File:  [gforth] / gforth / doc / Attic / texinfo.tex
Revision 1.4: download - view: text, annotated - select for diffs
Wed Aug 14 09:00:22 2002 UTC (21 years, 8 months ago) by anton
Branches: MAIN
CVS tags: v0-6-2, v0-6-1, v0-6-0, HEAD
vmgen documentation changes

    1: % texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
    2: %
    3: % Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
    4: \expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
    5: %
    6: \def\texinfoversion{2002-03-26.08}
    7: %
    8: % Copyright (C) 1985, 86, 88, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99,
    9: %               2000, 01, 02 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
   10: %
   11: % This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
   12: % modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
   13: % published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at
   14: % your option) any later version.
   15: %
   16: % This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
   17: % useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
   18: % of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
   19: % General Public License for more details.
   20: %
   21: % You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
   22: % along with this texinfo.tex file; see the file COPYING.  If not, write
   23: % to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
   24: % Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
   25: %
   26: % In other words, you are welcome to use, share and improve this program.
   27: % You are forbidden to forbid anyone else to use, share and improve
   28: % what you give them.   Help stamp out software-hoarding!
   29: %
   30: % Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
   31: % reports; you can get the latest version from:
   32: %   ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo.tex
   33: %     (and all GNU mirrors, see http://www.gnu.org/order/ftp.html)
   34: %   ftp://texinfo.org/texinfo/texinfo.tex
   35: %   ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex
   36: %     (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org),
   37: %   and /home/gd/gnu/doc/texinfo.tex on the GNU machines.
   38: % 
   39: % The texinfo.tex in any given Texinfo distribution could well be out
   40: % of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
   41: % 
   42: % Texinfo has a small home page at http://texinfo.org/ and also
   43: % http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.
   44: %
   45: % Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org.  Please include including a
   46: % complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the
   47: % problem.  Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated.
   48: %
   49: % To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the
   50: % texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution.  For a simple
   51: % manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this:
   52: %   tex foo.texi
   53: %   texindex foo.??
   54: %   tex foo.texi
   55: %   tex foo.texi
   56: %   dvips foo.dvi -o  # or whatever; this makes foo.ps.
   57: % The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct.
   58: % Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
   59: % than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
   60: %
   61: % It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages.  You can get
   62: % the existing language-specific files from the full Texinfo distribution.
   63: 
   64: \message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
   65: 
   66: % If in a .fmt file, print the version number
   67: % and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
   68: % they might have appeared in the input file name.
   69: \everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
   70:   \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
   71: 
   72: % Save some parts of plain tex whose names we will redefine.
   73: \let\ptexb=\b
   74: \let\ptexbullet=\bullet
   75: \let\ptexc=\c
   76: \let\ptexcomma=\,
   77: \let\ptexdot=\.
   78: \let\ptexdots=\dots
   79: \let\ptexend=\end
   80: \let\ptexequiv=\equiv
   81: \let\ptexexclam=\!
   82: \let\ptexi=\i
   83: \let\ptexlbrace=\{
   84: \let\ptexrbrace=\}
   85: \let\ptexstar=\*
   86: \let\ptext=\t
   87: 
   88: % We never want plain's outer \+ definition in Texinfo.
   89: % For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
   90: \let\+ = \relax
   91: 
   92: \message{Basics,}
   93: \chardef\other=12
   94: 
   95: % If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
   96: % starts a new line in the output.
   97: \newlinechar = `^^J
   98: 
   99: % Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
  100: \ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined  \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
  101: \ifx\putwordChapter\undefined   \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
  102: \ifx\putwordfile\undefined      \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
  103: \ifx\putwordin\undefined        \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi
  104: \ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined     \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi
  105: \ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi
  106: \ifx\putwordInfo\undefined      \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
  107: \ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi
  108: \ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined  \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
  109: \ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined   \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi
  110: \ifx\putwordof\undefined        \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi
  111: \ifx\putwordon\undefined        \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi
  112: \ifx\putwordpage\undefined      \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi
  113: \ifx\putwordsection\undefined   \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi
  114: \ifx\putwordSection\undefined   \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi
  115: \ifx\putwordsee\undefined       \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi
  116: \ifx\putwordSee\undefined       \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi
  117: \ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined  \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi
  118: \ifx\putwordTOC\undefined       \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi
  119: %
  120: \ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi
  121: \ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi
  122: \ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi
  123: \ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi
  124: \ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi
  125: \ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi
  126: \ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi
  127: \ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi
  128: \ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi
  129: \ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi
  130: \ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi
  131: \ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi
  132: %
  133: \ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi
  134: \ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined   \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi
  135: \ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi
  136: \ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
  137: \ifx\putwordDeftypevar\undefined\gdef\putwordDeftypevar{Variable}\fi
  138: \ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined   \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
  139: \ifx\putwordDeftypefun\undefined\gdef\putwordDeftypefun{Function}\fi
  140: 
  141: % Ignore a token.
  142: %
  143: \def\gobble#1{}
  144: 
  145: \hyphenation{ap-pen-dix}
  146: \hyphenation{mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers}
  147: \hyphenation{eshell}
  148: \hyphenation{white-space}
  149: 
  150: % Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
  151: \newdimen \bindingoffset
  152: \newdimen \normaloffset
  153: \newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
  154: 
  155: % Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
  156: % and nothing on the terminal.  We don't just call \tracingall here,
  157: % since that produces some useless output on the terminal.
  158: %
  159: \def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
  160: \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
  161: \def\loggingall{\tracingcommands2 \tracingstats2
  162:    \tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1
  163:    \tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1
  164:    \showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen
  165: }%
  166: \else
  167: \def\loggingall{\tracingcommands3 \tracingstats2
  168:    \tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1
  169:    \tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1
  170:    \tracingscantokens1 \tracingassigns1 \tracingifs1
  171:    \tracinggroups1 \tracingnesting2
  172:    \showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen
  173: }%
  174: \fi
  175: 
  176: % add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions.  If the last thing
  177: % we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space.
  178: % 
  179: \def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount
  180:   \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi}
  181: \def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount
  182:   \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi}
  183: \def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount
  184:   \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi}
  185: 
  186: % For @cropmarks command.
  187: % Do @cropmarks to get crop marks.
  188: %
  189: \newif\ifcropmarks
  190: \let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue
  191: %
  192: % Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners.
  193: % Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986
  194: %
  195: \newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines
  196: \newdimen\cornerlong  \cornerlong=1pc
  197: \newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt
  198: \newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in
  199: 
  200: % Main output routine.
  201: \chardef\PAGE = 255
  202: \output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
  203: 
  204: \newbox\headlinebox
  205: \newbox\footlinebox
  206: 
  207: % \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument.  Note that \pagecontents
  208: % does insertions, but you have to call it yourself.
  209: \def\onepageout#1{%
  210:   \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi
  211:   %
  212:   \ifodd\pageno  \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
  213:   \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
  214:   %
  215:   % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
  216:   % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
  217:   \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}%
  218:   \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}%
  219:   %
  220:   {%
  221:     % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
  222:     % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
  223:     % before the \shipout runs.
  224:     %
  225:     \escapechar = `\\     % use backslash in output files.
  226:     \indexdummies         % don't expand commands in the output.
  227:     \normalturnoffactive  % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if
  228:                    % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
  229:     \shipout\vbox{%
  230:       % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page.
  231:       \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfmkdest{\the\pageno} \fi
  232:       %
  233:       \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
  234:         \hsize = \outerhsize
  235:         \vskip-\topandbottommargin
  236:         \vtop to0pt{%
  237:           \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}%
  238:           \nointerlineskip
  239:           \line{%
  240:             \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}%
  241:             \hfill
  242:             \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}%
  243:           }%
  244:           \vss}%
  245:         \vskip\topandbottommargin
  246:         \line\bgroup
  247:           \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize.
  248:           \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi
  249:           \vbox\bgroup
  250:       \fi
  251:       %
  252:       \unvbox\headlinebox
  253:       \pagebody{#1}%
  254:       \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
  255:         % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
  256:         % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingxxx.)
  257:         % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
  258:         \vskip 2\baselineskip
  259:         \unvbox\footlinebox
  260:       \fi
  261:       %
  262:       \ifcropmarks
  263:           \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup
  264:         \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup
  265:         \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill
  266:         \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick
  267:         \vbox to0pt{\vss
  268:           \line{%
  269:             \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}%
  270:             \hfill
  271:             \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}%
  272:           }%
  273:           \nointerlineskip
  274:           \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}%
  275:         }%
  276:       \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
  277:       \fi
  278:     }% end of \shipout\vbox
  279:   }% end of group with \turnoffactive
  280:   \advancepageno
  281:   \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
  282: }
  283: 
  284: \newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
  285: 
  286: \def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
  287: {\catcode`\@ =11
  288: \gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
  289: % marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
  290: \ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
  291:   \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
  292: \dimen@=\dp#1 \unvbox#1
  293: \ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
  294: \ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
  295: }
  296: 
  297: % Here are the rules for the cropmarks.  Note that they are
  298: % offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize
  299: % (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986)
  300: %
  301: \def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong}
  302: \def\nstop{\vbox
  303:   {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}}
  304: \def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong}
  305: \def\nsbot{\vbox
  306:   {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}}
  307: 
  308: % Parse an argument, then pass it to #1.  The argument is the rest of
  309: % the input line (except we remove a trailing comment).  #1 should be a
  310: % macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
  311: %
  312: \def\parsearg#1{%
  313:   \let\next = #1%
  314:   \begingroup
  315:     \obeylines
  316:     \futurelet\temp\parseargx
  317: }
  318: 
  319: % If the next token is an obeyed space (from an @example environment or
  320: % the like), remove it and recurse.  Otherwise, we're done.
  321: \def\parseargx{%
  322:   % \obeyedspace is defined far below, after the definition of \sepspaces.
  323:   \ifx\obeyedspace\temp
  324:     \expandafter\parseargdiscardspace
  325:   \else
  326:     \expandafter\parseargline
  327:   \fi
  328: }
  329: 
  330: % Remove a single space (as the delimiter token to the macro call).
  331: {\obeyspaces %
  332:  \gdef\parseargdiscardspace {\futurelet\temp\parseargx}}
  333: 
  334: {\obeylines %
  335:   \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
  336:     \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
  337:     %
  338:     % First remove any @c comment, then any @comment.
  339:     % Result of each macro is put in \toks0.
  340:     \argremovec #1\c\relax %
  341:     \expandafter\argremovecomment \the\toks0 \comment\relax %
  342:     %
  343:     % Call the caller's macro, saved as \next in \parsearg.
  344:     \expandafter\next\expandafter{\the\toks0}%
  345:   }%
  346: }
  347: 
  348: % Since all \c{,omment} does is throw away the argument, we can let TeX
  349: % do that for us.  The \relax here is matched by the \relax in the call
  350: % in \parseargline; it could be more or less anything, its purpose is
  351: % just to delimit the argument to the \c.
  352: \def\argremovec#1\c#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
  353: \def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
  354: 
  355: % \argremovec{,omment} might leave us with trailing spaces, though; e.g.,
  356: %    @end itemize  @c foo
  357: % will have two active spaces as part of the argument with the
  358: % `itemize'.  Here we remove all active spaces from #1, and assign the
  359: % result to \toks0.
  360: %
  361: % This loses if there are any *other* active characters besides spaces
  362: % in the argument -- _ ^ +, for example -- since they get expanded.
  363: % Fortunately, Texinfo does not define any such commands.  (If it ever
  364: % does, the catcode of the characters in questionwill have to be changed
  365: % here.)  But this means we cannot call \removeactivespaces as part of
  366: % \argremovec{,omment}, since @c uses \parsearg, and thus the argument
  367: % that \parsearg gets might well have any character at all in it.
  368: %
  369: \def\removeactivespaces#1{%
  370:   \begingroup
  371:     \ignoreactivespaces
  372:     \edef\temp{#1}%
  373:     \global\toks0 = \expandafter{\temp}%
  374:   \endgroup
  375: }
  376: 
  377: % Change the active space to expand to nothing.
  378: %
  379: \begingroup
  380:   \obeyspaces
  381:   \gdef\ignoreactivespaces{\obeyspaces\let =\empty}
  382: \endgroup
  383: 
  384: 
  385: \def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
  386: 
  387: %% These are used to keep @begin/@end levels from running away
  388: %% Call \inENV within environments (after a \begingroup)
  389: \newif\ifENV \ENVfalse \def\inENV{\ifENV\relax\else\ENVtrue\fi}
  390: \def\ENVcheck{%
  391: \ifENV\errmessage{Still within an environment; press RETURN to continue}
  392: \endgroup\fi} % This is not perfect, but it should reduce lossage
  393: 
  394: % @begin foo  is the same as @foo, for now.
  395: \newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
  396: 
  397: \outer\def\begin{\parsearg\beginxxx}
  398: 
  399: \def\beginxxx #1{%
  400: \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\relax
  401: {\errhelp=\EMsimple \errmessage{Undefined command @begin #1}}\else
  402: \csname #1\endcsname\fi}
  403: 
  404: % @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
  405: %
  406: \def\end{\parsearg\endxxx}
  407: \def\endxxx #1{%
  408:   \removeactivespaces{#1}%
  409:   \edef\endthing{\the\toks0}%
  410:   %
  411:   \expandafter\ifx\csname E\endthing\endcsname\relax
  412:     \expandafter\ifx\csname \endthing\endcsname\relax
  413:       % There's no \foo, i.e., no ``environment'' foo.
  414:       \errhelp = \EMsimple
  415:       \errmessage{Undefined command `@end \endthing'}%
  416:     \else
  417:       \unmatchedenderror\endthing
  418:     \fi
  419:   \else
  420:     % Everything's ok; the right environment has been started.
  421:     \csname E\endthing\endcsname
  422:   \fi
  423: }
  424: 
  425: % There is an environment #1, but it hasn't been started.  Give an error.
  426: %
  427: \def\unmatchedenderror#1{%
  428:   \errhelp = \EMsimple
  429:   \errmessage{This `@end #1' doesn't have a matching `@#1'}%
  430: }
  431: 
  432: % Define the control sequence \E#1 to give an unmatched @end error.
  433: %
  434: \def\defineunmatchedend#1{%
  435:   \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\unmatchedenderror{#1}}%
  436: }
  437: 
  438: 
  439: % Single-spacing is done by various environments (specifically, in
  440: % \nonfillstart and \quotations).
  441: \newskip\singlespaceskip \singlespaceskip = 12.5pt
  442: \def\singlespace{%
  443:   % Why was this kern here?  It messes up equalizing space above and below
  444:   % environments.  --karl, 6may93
  445:   %{\advance \baselineskip by -\singlespaceskip
  446:   %\kern \baselineskip}%
  447:   \setleading\singlespaceskip
  448: }
  449: 
  450: %% Simple single-character @ commands
  451: 
  452: % @@ prints an @
  453: % Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr).
  454: \def\@{{\tt\char64}}
  455: 
  456: % This is turned off because it was never documented
  457: % and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures.
  458: %% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and '
  459: %% but suppressing ligatures.
  460: %\def\`{{`}}
  461: %\def\'{{'}}
  462: 
  463: % Used to generate quoted braces.
  464: \def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}}
  465: \def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}}
  466: \let\{=\mylbrace
  467: \let\}=\myrbrace
  468: \begingroup
  469:   % Definitions to produce actual \{ & \} command in an index.
  470:   \catcode`\{ = 12 \catcode`\} = 12
  471:   \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
  472:   \catcode`\@ = 0 \catcode`\\ = 12
  473:   @gdef@lbracecmd[\{]%
  474:   @gdef@rbracecmd[\}]%
  475: @endgroup
  476: 
  477: % Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
  478: % Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @v @H.
  479: \let\, = \c
  480: \let\dotaccent = \.
  481: \def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
  482: \let\tieaccent = \t
  483: \let\ubaraccent = \b
  484: \let\udotaccent = \d
  485: 
  486: % Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown
  487: % Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (and lowercase versions) @ss.
  488: \def\questiondown{?`}
  489: \def\exclamdown{!`}
  490: 
  491: % Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
  492: \def\imacro{i}
  493: \def\jmacro{j}
  494: \def\dotless#1{%
  495:   \def\temp{#1}%
  496:   \ifx\temp\imacro \ptexi
  497:   \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \j
  498:   \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
  499:   \fi\fi
  500: }
  501: 
  502: % Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
  503: % equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
  504: % at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
  505: % since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
  506: % penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
  507: {\catcode`@ = 11
  508:  % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
  509:  % if the definition is written into an index file.
  510:  \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
  511:  \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
  512: }
  513: 
  514: % @: forces normal size whitespace following.
  515: \def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
  516: 
  517: % @* forces a line break.
  518: \def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
  519: 
  520: % @. is an end-of-sentence period.
  521: \def\.{.\spacefactor=3000 }
  522: 
  523: % @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
  524: \def\!{!\spacefactor=3000 }
  525: 
  526: % @? is an end-of-sentence query.
  527: \def\?{?\spacefactor=3000 }
  528: 
  529: % @w prevents a word break.  Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
  530: % beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
  531: % produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
  532: \def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
  533: 
  534: % @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
  535: % it in a TeX vbox.  We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
  536: % to keep its height that of a normal line.  According to the rules for
  537: % \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
  538: % max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0).  If that height is large,
  539: % therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
  540: % the text is small, which looks bad.
  541: %
  542: \def\group{\begingroup
  543:   \ifnum\catcode13=\active \else
  544:     \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
  545:     \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
  546:   \fi
  547:   %
  548:   % The \vtop we start below produces a box with normal height and large
  549:   % depth; thus, TeX puts \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the
  550:   % next line of text is done) \lineskip glue after it.  (See p.82 of
  551:   % the TeXbook.)  Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
  552:   % above.  But it's pretty close.
  553:   \def\Egroup{%
  554:     \egroup           % End the \vtop.
  555:     \endgroup         % End the \group.
  556:   }%
  557:   %
  558:   \vtop\bgroup
  559:     % We have to put a strut on the last line in case the @group is in
  560:     % the midst of an example, rather than completely enclosing it.
  561:     % Otherwise, the interline space between the last line of the group
  562:     % and the first line afterwards is too small.  But we can't put the
  563:     % strut in \Egroup, since there it would be on a line by itself.
  564:     % Hence this just inserts a strut at the beginning of each line.
  565:     \everypar = {\strut}%
  566:     %
  567:     % Since we have a strut on every line, we don't need any of TeX's
  568:     % normal interline spacing.
  569:     \offinterlineskip
  570:     %
  571:     % OK, but now we have to do something about blank
  572:     % lines in the input in @example-like environments, which normally
  573:     % just turn into \lisppar, which will insert no space now that we've
  574:     % turned off the interline space.  Simplest is to make them be an
  575:     % empty paragraph.
  576:     \ifx\par\lisppar
  577:       \edef\par{\leavevmode \par}%
  578:       %
  579:       % Reset ^^M's definition to new definition of \par.
  580:       \obeylines
  581:     \fi
  582:     %
  583:     % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
  584:     % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
  585:     % end-of-line in the output.  We don't want the end-of-line after
  586:     % the `@group' to put extra space in the output.  Since @group
  587:     % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
  588:     % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
  589:     \comment
  590: }
  591: %
  592: % TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
  593: % message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
  594: %
  595: \newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
  596: group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
  597: where each line of input produces a line of output.}
  598: 
  599: % @need space-in-mils
  600: % forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
  601: 
  602: \newdimen\mil  \mil=0.001in
  603: 
  604: \def\need{\parsearg\needx}
  605: 
  606: % Old definition--didn't work.
  607: %\def\needx #1{\par %
  608: %% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally
  609: %% if the depth of the box does not fit.
  610: %{\baselineskip=0pt%
  611: %\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak
  612: %\prevdepth=-1000pt
  613: %}}
  614: 
  615: \def\needx#1{%
  616:   % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
  617:   % paragraph.
  618:   \par
  619:   %
  620:   % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless.
  621:   \dimen0 = #1\mil
  622:   \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox
  623:   \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox
  624:   \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2
  625:     %
  626:     % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the
  627:     % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line.
  628:     % And a page break here is fine.
  629:     \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}%
  630:     %
  631:     % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
  632:     % main vertical list is 10000 or more.  But in order to see if the
  633:     % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
  634:     % page breaks.  On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
  635:     % page after the empty box.  So we use a penalty of 9999.
  636:     %
  637:     % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
  638:     % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
  639:     % sight.  (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
  640:     % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
  641:     % good page breaking, for example.)  However, I could not construct an
  642:     % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
  643:     % document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
  644:     \penalty9999
  645:     %
  646:     % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
  647:     \kern -#1\mil
  648:     %
  649:     % Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
  650:     \nobreak
  651:   \fi
  652: }
  653: 
  654: % @br   forces paragraph break
  655: 
  656: \let\br = \par
  657: 
  658: % @dots{} output an ellipsis using the current font.
  659: % We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in a typewriter
  660: % font as three actual period characters.
  661: %
  662: \def\dots{%
  663:   \leavevmode
  664:   \hbox to 1.5em{%
  665:     \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil
  666:     .\hss.\hss.%
  667:     \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil
  668:   }%
  669: }
  670: 
  671: % @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
  672: %
  673: \def\enddots{%
  674:   \leavevmode
  675:   \hbox to 2em{%
  676:     \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil
  677:     .\hss.\hss.\hss.%
  678:     \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil
  679:   }%
  680:   \spacefactor=3000
  681: }
  682: 
  683: 
  684: % @page    forces the start of a new page
  685: %
  686: \def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
  687: 
  688: % @exdent text....
  689: % outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
  690: 
  691: % This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
  692: % That's how much \exdent should take out.
  693: \newskip\exdentamount
  694: 
  695: % This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
  696: \def\exdent{\parsearg\exdentyyy}
  697: \def\exdentyyy #1{{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}}
  698: 
  699: % This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
  700: \def\nofillexdent{\parsearg\nofillexdentyyy}
  701: \def\nofillexdentyyy #1{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
  702: \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
  703: 
  704: % @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current
  705: % paragraph.  For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion
  706: % class.  WHICH is `l' or `r'.
  707: %
  708: \newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
  709: \def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
  710: %
  711: \def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{%
  712:   \nobreak
  713:   \kern-\strutdepth
  714:   \vtop to \strutdepth{%
  715:     \baselineskip=\strutdepth
  716:     \vss
  717:     % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to
  718:     % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size.
  719:     \ifx#1l%
  720:       \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}%
  721:     \else
  722:       \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}%
  723:     \fi
  724:     \null
  725:   }%
  726: }}
  727: \def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l}
  728: \def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r}
  729: %
  730: % @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]}
  731: % (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right;
  732: % else use TEXT for both).
  733: % 
  734: \def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish}
  735: \def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing.
  736:   \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 
  737:   \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
  738:     \def\lefttext{#1}%  have both texts
  739:     \def\righttext{#2}%
  740:   \else
  741:     \def\lefttext{#1}%  have only one text
  742:     \def\righttext{#1}%
  743:   \fi
  744:   %
  745:   \ifodd\pageno
  746:     \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin
  747:   \else
  748:     \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}%
  749:   \fi
  750:   \temp
  751: }
  752: 
  753: % @include file    insert text of that file as input.
  754: % Allow normal characters that  we make active in the argument (a file name).
  755: \def\include{\begingroup
  756:   \catcode`\\=12
  757:   \catcode`~=12
  758:   \catcode`^=12
  759:   \catcode`_=12
  760:   \catcode`|=12
  761:   \catcode`<=12
  762:   \catcode`>=12
  763:   \catcode`+=12
  764:   \parsearg\includezzz}
  765: % Restore active chars for included file.
  766: \def\includezzz#1{\endgroup\begingroup
  767:   % Read the included file in a group so nested @include's work.
  768:   \def\thisfile{#1}%
  769:   \input\thisfile
  770: \endgroup}
  771: 
  772: \def\thisfile{}
  773: 
  774: % @center line   outputs that line, centered
  775: 
  776: \def\center{\parsearg\centerzzz}
  777: \def\centerzzz #1{{\advance\hsize by -\leftskip
  778: \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
  779: \centerline{#1}}}
  780: 
  781: % @sp n   outputs n lines of vertical space
  782: 
  783: \def\sp{\parsearg\spxxx}
  784: \def\spxxx #1{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
  785: 
  786: % @comment ...line which is ignored...
  787: % @c is the same as @comment
  788: % @ignore ... @end ignore  is another way to write a comment
  789: 
  790: \def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other%
  791: \catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other%
  792: \commentxxx}
  793: {\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
  794: 
  795: \let\c=\comment
  796: 
  797: % @paragraphindent NCHARS
  798: % We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.
  799: % We cannot implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
  800: % 
  801: \def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords
  802: \def\noneword{none}
  803: %
  804: \def\paragraphindent{\parsearg\doparagraphindent}
  805: \def\doparagraphindent#1{%
  806:   \def\temp{#1}%
  807:   \ifx\temp\asisword
  808:   \else
  809:     \ifx\temp\noneword
  810:       \defaultparindent = 0pt
  811:     \else
  812:       \defaultparindent = #1em
  813:     \fi
  814:   \fi
  815:   \parindent = \defaultparindent
  816: }
  817: 
  818: % @exampleindent NCHARS
  819: % We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.
  820: % It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but
  821: % I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.
  822: \def\exampleindent{\parsearg\doexampleindent}
  823: \def\doexampleindent#1{%
  824:   \def\temp{#1}%
  825:   \ifx\temp\asisword
  826:   \else
  827:     \ifx\temp\noneword
  828:       \lispnarrowing = 0pt
  829:     \else
  830:       \lispnarrowing = #1em
  831:     \fi
  832:   \fi
  833: }
  834: 
  835: % @asis just yields its argument.  Used with @table, for example.
  836: %
  837: \def\asis#1{#1}
  838: 
  839: % @math outputs its argument in math mode.
  840: % We don't use $'s directly in the definition of \math because we need
  841: % to set catcodes according to plain TeX first, to allow for subscripts,
  842: % superscripts, special math chars, etc.
  843: % 
  844: % @math does not do math typesetting in section titles, index
  845: % entries, and other such contexts where the catcodes are set before
  846: % @math gets a chance to work.  This could perhaps be fixed, but for now
  847: % at least we can have real math in the main text, where it's needed most.
  848: %
  849: \let\implicitmath = $%$ font-lock fix
  850: %
  851: % One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean
  852: % an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}.  So make
  853: % _ within @math be active (mathcode "8000), and distinguish by seeing
  854: % if the current family is \slfam, which is what @var uses.
  855: % 
  856: {\catcode95 = \active  % 95 = _
  857: \gdef\mathunderscore{%
  858:   \catcode95=\active
  859:   \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}%
  860: }}
  861: %
  862: % Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a \ character.
  863: % FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (why?), but
  864: % this is not advertised and we don't care.  Texinfo does not
  865: % otherwise define @\.
  866: % 
  867: % The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\.
  868: \def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi}
  869: %
  870: \def\math{%
  871:   \tex
  872:   \mathcode`\_="8000 \mathunderscore
  873:   \let\\ = \mathbackslash
  874:   \implicitmath\finishmath}
  875: \def\finishmath#1{#1\implicitmath\Etex}
  876: 
  877: % @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above.
  878: \def\bullet{\implicitmath\ptexbullet\implicitmath}
  879: \def\minus{\implicitmath-\implicitmath}
  880: 
  881: % @refill is a no-op.
  882: \let\refill=\relax
  883: 
  884: % If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
  885: % be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
  886: % This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename).
  887: %
  888: \newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.
  889: \let\novalidate = \linksfalse
  890: 
  891: % @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file.
  892: % So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
  893: % This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
  894: \def\setfilename{%
  895:    \iflinks
  896:      \readauxfile
  897:    \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case.
  898:    \openindices
  899:    \fixbackslash  % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
  900:    \global\let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
  901:    %
  902:    % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
  903:    % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
  904:    % Just to be on the safe side, close the input stream before the \input.
  905:    \openin 1 texinfo.cnf
  906:    \ifeof1 \let\temp=\relax \else \def\temp{\input texinfo.cnf }\fi
  907:    \closein1
  908:    \temp
  909:    %
  910:    \comment % Ignore the actual filename.
  911: }
  912: 
  913: % Called from \setfilename.
  914: %
  915: \def\openindices{%
  916:   \newindex{cp}%
  917:   \newcodeindex{fn}%
  918:   \newcodeindex{vr}%
  919:   \newcodeindex{tp}%
  920:   \newcodeindex{ky}%
  921:   \newcodeindex{pg}%
  922: }
  923: 
  924: % @bye.
  925: \outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
  926: 
  927: 
  928: \message{pdf,}
  929: % adobe `portable' document format
  930: \newcount\tempnum
  931: \newcount\lnkcount
  932: \newtoks\filename
  933: \newcount\filenamelength
  934: \newcount\pgn
  935: \newtoks\toksA
  936: \newtoks\toksB
  937: \newtoks\toksC
  938: \newtoks\toksD
  939: \newbox\boxA
  940: \newcount\countA
  941: \newif\ifpdf
  942: \newif\ifpdfmakepagedest
  943: 
  944: \ifx\pdfoutput\undefined
  945:   \pdffalse
  946:   \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
  947:   \let\pdfurl = \gobble
  948:   \let\endlink = \relax
  949:   \let\linkcolor = \relax
  950:   \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
  951: \else
  952:   \pdftrue
  953:   \pdfoutput = 1
  954:   \input pdfcolor
  955:   \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
  956:     \def\imagewidth{#2}%
  957:     \def\imageheight{#3}%
  958:     % without \immediate, pdftex seg faults when the same image is
  959:     % included twice.  (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.)
  960:     \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
  961:       \immediate\pdfimage
  962:     \else
  963:       \immediate\pdfximage
  964:     \fi
  965:       \ifx\empty\imagewidth\else width \imagewidth \fi
  966:       \ifx\empty\imageheight\else height \imageheight \fi
  967:       \ifnum\pdftexversion<13
  968: 	 #1.pdf%
  969:        \else
  970:          {#1.pdf}%
  971:        \fi
  972:     \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else
  973:       \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage
  974:     \fi}
  975:   \def\pdfmkdest#1{{\normalturnoffactive \pdfdest name{#1} xyz}}
  976:   \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1}
  977:   \let\linkcolor = \Blue  % was Cyan, but that seems light?
  978:   \def\endlink{\Black\pdfendlink}
  979:   % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines
  980:   % come from Petr Olsak
  981:   \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0%
  982:     \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi}
  983:   \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax
  984:     \advance\tempnum by1
  985:     \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}}
  986:   \def\pdfmakeoutlines{{%
  987:     \openin 1 \jobname.toc
  988:     \ifeof 1\else\begingroup
  989:       \closein 1 
  990:       \indexnofonts
  991:       \def\tt{}
  992:       \let\_ = \normalunderscore
  993:       % Thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks  
  994:       \edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace
  995:       \edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace
  996:       %
  997:       \def\chapentry ##1##2##3{}
  998:       \let\appendixentry = \chapentry
  999:       \def\unnumbchapentry ##1##2{}
 1000:       \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{\advancenumber{chap##2}}
 1001:       \def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2##3{\advancenumber{chap##2}}
 1002:       \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{\advancenumber{sec##2.##3}}
 1003:       \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4{\advancenumber{sec##2.##3}}
 1004:       \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{\advancenumber{subsec##2.##3.##4}}
 1005:       \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{\advancenumber{subsec##2.##3.##4}}
 1006:       \input \jobname.toc
 1007:       \def\chapentry ##1##2##3{%
 1008:         \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##3}}count-\expnumber{chap##2}{##1}}
 1009:       \let\appendixentry = \chapentry
 1010:       \def\unnumbchapentry ##1##2{%
 1011:         \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##2}}{##1}}
 1012:       \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{%
 1013:         \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##4}}count-\expnumber{sec##2.##3}{##1}}
 1014:       \def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2##3{%
 1015:         \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##3}}{##1}}
 1016:       \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{%
 1017:         \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##5}}count-\expnumber{subsec##2.##3.##4}{##1}}
 1018:       \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4{%
 1019:         \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##4}}{##1}}
 1020:       \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{%
 1021:         \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##6}}{##1}}
 1022:       \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{%
 1023:         \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##5}}{##1}}
 1024:       \input \jobname.toc
 1025:     \endgroup\fi
 1026:   }}
 1027:   \def\makelinks #1,{%
 1028:     \def\params{#1}\def\E{END}%
 1029:     \ifx\params\E
 1030:       \let\nextmakelinks=\relax
 1031:     \else
 1032:       \let\nextmakelinks=\makelinks
 1033:       \ifnum\lnkcount>0,\fi
 1034:       \picknum{#1}%
 1035:       \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} 
 1036:         goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\the\pgn}}%
 1037:       \linkcolor #1%
 1038:       \advance\lnkcount by 1%
 1039:       \endlink
 1040:     \fi
 1041:     \nextmakelinks
 1042:   }
 1043:   \def\picknum#1{\expandafter\pn#1}
 1044:   \def\pn#1{%
 1045:     \def\p{#1}%
 1046:     \ifx\p\lbrace
 1047:       \let\nextpn=\ppn
 1048:     \else
 1049:       \let\nextpn=\ppnn
 1050:       \def\first{#1}
 1051:     \fi
 1052:     \nextpn
 1053:   }
 1054:   \def\ppn#1{\pgn=#1\gobble}
 1055:   \def\ppnn{\pgn=\first}
 1056:   \def\pdfmklnk#1{\lnkcount=0\makelinks #1,END,}
 1057:   \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
 1058:   \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
 1059:     \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
 1060:     \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
 1061:       \ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
 1062:         \advance\filenamelength by 1
 1063:       \fi
 1064:     \fi
 1065:     \nextsp}
 1066:   \def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax}
 1067:   \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
 1068:     \let \startlink \pdfannotlink
 1069:   \else
 1070:     \let \startlink \pdfstartlink
 1071:   \fi
 1072:   \def\pdfurl#1{%
 1073:     \begingroup
 1074:       \normalturnoffactive\def\@{@}%
 1075:       \let\value=\expandablevalue
 1076:       \leavevmode\Red
 1077:       \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
 1078:         user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}%
 1079:         % #1
 1080:     \endgroup}
 1081:   \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
 1082:   \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
 1083:   \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
 1084:   \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
 1085:   \def\maketoks{%
 1086:     \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|
 1087:     \ifx\first0\adn0
 1088:     \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
 1089:     \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
 1090:     \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9 
 1091:     \else
 1092:       \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
 1093:       \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
 1094:         \let\next=\maketoks
 1095:         \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD}
 1096:         \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi
 1097:       \fi
 1098:     \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
 1099:     \next}
 1100:   \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
 1101:     {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
 1102:   \def\pdflink#1{%
 1103:     \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}
 1104:     \linkcolor #1\endlink}
 1105:   \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
 1106: \fi % \ifx\pdfoutput
 1107: 
 1108: 
 1109: \message{fonts,}
 1110: % Font-change commands.
 1111: 
 1112: % Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
 1113: % So we set up a \sf analogous to plain's \rm, etc.
 1114: \newfam\sffam
 1115: \def\sf{\fam=\sffam \tensf}
 1116: \let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
 1117: 
 1118: % We don't need math for this one.
 1119: \def\ttsl{\tenttsl}
 1120: 
 1121: % Default leading.
 1122: \newdimen\textleading  \textleading = 13.2pt
 1123: 
 1124: % Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
 1125: % correspondingly.  There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
 1126: % used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
 1127: %
 1128: \def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
 1129: \def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
 1130: \def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
 1131: %
 1132: \def\setleading#1{%
 1133:   \normalbaselineskip = #1\relax
 1134:   \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
 1135:   \normalbaselines
 1136:   \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
 1137:     \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
 1138:                     depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
 1139:   }%
 1140: }
 1141: 
 1142: % Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the
 1143: % specified font prefix (normally `cm').
 1144: % #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor
 1145: \def\setfont#1#2#3#4{\font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4}
 1146: 
 1147: % Use cm as the default font prefix.
 1148: % To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
 1149: % before you read in texinfo.tex.
 1150: \ifx\fontprefix\undefined
 1151: \def\fontprefix{cm}
 1152: \fi
 1153: % Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
 1154: \def\rmshape{r}
 1155: \def\rmbshape{bx}               %where the normal face is bold
 1156: \def\bfshape{b}
 1157: \def\bxshape{bx}
 1158: \def\ttshape{tt}
 1159: \def\ttbshape{tt}
 1160: \def\ttslshape{sltt}
 1161: \def\itshape{ti}
 1162: \def\itbshape{bxti}
 1163: \def\slshape{sl}
 1164: \def\slbshape{bxsl}
 1165: \def\sfshape{ss}
 1166: \def\sfbshape{ss}
 1167: \def\scshape{csc}
 1168: \def\scbshape{csc}
 1169: 
 1170: \newcount\mainmagstep
 1171: \ifx\bigger\relax
 1172:   % not really supported.
 1173:   \let\mainmagstep=\magstep1
 1174:   \setfont\textrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
 1175:   \setfont\texttt\ttshape{12}{1000}
 1176: \else
 1177:   \mainmagstep=\magstephalf
 1178:   \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
 1179:   \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
 1180: \fi
 1181: % Instead of cmb10, you many want to use cmbx10.
 1182: % cmbx10 is a prettier font on its own, but cmb10
 1183: % looks better when embedded in a line with cmr10.
 1184: \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
 1185: \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
 1186: \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
 1187: \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
 1188: \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
 1189: \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
 1190: \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
 1191: \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
 1192: 
 1193: % A few fonts for @defun, etc.
 1194: \setfont\defbf\bxshape{10}{\magstep1} %was 1314
 1195: \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}
 1196: \def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \bf}
 1197: 
 1198: % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
 1199: \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}
 1200: \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}
 1201: \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}
 1202: \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}
 1203: \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}
 1204: \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}
 1205: \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}
 1206: \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}
 1207: \font\smalli=cmmi9
 1208: \font\smallsy=cmsy9
 1209: 
 1210: % Fonts for small examples (8pt).
 1211: \setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
 1212: \setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}
 1213: \setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}
 1214: \setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}
 1215: \setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}
 1216: \setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}
 1217: \setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}
 1218: \setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}
 1219: \font\smalleri=cmmi8
 1220: \font\smallersy=cmsy8
 1221: 
 1222: % Fonts for title page:
 1223: \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}
 1224: \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}
 1225: \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}
 1226: \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}
 1227: \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}
 1228: \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}
 1229: \let\titlebf=\titlerm
 1230: \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}
 1231: \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
 1232: \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
 1233: \def\authorrm{\secrm}
 1234: 
 1235: % Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
 1236: \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}
 1237: \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}
 1238: \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}
 1239: \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}
 1240: \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}
 1241: \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}
 1242: \let\chapbf=\chaprm
 1243: \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}
 1244: \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
 1245: \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
 1246: 
 1247: % Section fonts (14.4pt).
 1248: \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}
 1249: \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}
 1250: \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}
 1251: \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}
 1252: \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}
 1253: \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}
 1254: \let\secbf\secrm
 1255: \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}
 1256: \font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
 1257: \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
 1258: 
 1259: % Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
 1260: \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
 1261: \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}
 1262: \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}
 1263: \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
 1264: \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}
 1265: \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
 1266: \let\ssecbf\ssecrm
 1267: \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}
 1268: \font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
 1269: \font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
 1270: % The smallcaps and symbol fonts should actually be scaled \magstep1.5,
 1271: % but that is not a standard magnification.
 1272: 
 1273: % In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
 1274: % we have to define the \textfont of the standard families.  Since
 1275: % texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except
 1276: % in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and
 1277: % \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts).
 1278: %
 1279: \def\resetmathfonts{%
 1280:   \textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy
 1281:   \textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf
 1282:   \textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf
 1283: }
 1284: 
 1285: % The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
 1286: % of just \STYLE.  We do this so that font changes will continue to work
 1287: % in math mode, where it is the current \fam that is relevant in most
 1288: % cases, not the current font.  Plain TeX does \def\bf{\fam=\bffam
 1289: % \tenbf}, for example.  By redefining \tenbf, we obviate the need to
 1290: % redefine \bf itself.
 1291: \def\textfonts{%
 1292:   \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
 1293:   \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
 1294:   \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy \let\tenttsl=\textttsl
 1295:   \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}}
 1296: \def\titlefonts{%
 1297:   \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
 1298:   \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
 1299:   \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
 1300:   \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
 1301:   \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}}
 1302: \def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}}
 1303: \def\chapfonts{%
 1304:   \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
 1305:   \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
 1306:   \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
 1307:   \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}}
 1308: \def\secfonts{%
 1309:   \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
 1310:   \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
 1311:   \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy \let\tenttsl=\secttsl
 1312:   \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}}
 1313: \def\subsecfonts{%
 1314:   \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
 1315:   \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
 1316:   \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
 1317:   \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}}
 1318: \let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts % Maybe make sssec fonts scaled magstephalf?
 1319: \def\smallfonts{%
 1320:   \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl
 1321:   \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc
 1322:   \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy
 1323:   \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl
 1324:   \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
 1325: \def\smallerfonts{%
 1326:   \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl
 1327:   \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc
 1328:   \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy
 1329:   \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl
 1330:   \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}}
 1331: \let\smallexamplefonts = \smallerfonts
 1332: 
 1333: % Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
 1334: %
 1335: \textfonts
 1336: 
 1337: % Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
 1338: \def\angleleft{$\langle$}
 1339: \def\angleright{$\rangle$}
 1340: 
 1341: % Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
 1342: \newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
 1343: 
 1344: % Fonts for short table of contents.
 1345: \setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
 1346: \setfont\shortcontbf\bxshape{12}{1000}
 1347: \setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}
 1348: 
 1349: %% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans
 1350: %% serif) and @ii for TeX italic
 1351: 
 1352: % \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction
 1353: % unless the following character is such as not to need one.
 1354: \def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else\/\fi\fi\fi}
 1355: \def\smartslanted#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
 1356: \def\smartitalic#1{{\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
 1357: 
 1358: \let\i=\smartitalic
 1359: \let\var=\smartslanted
 1360: \let\dfn=\smartslanted
 1361: \let\emph=\smartitalic
 1362: \let\cite=\smartslanted
 1363: 
 1364: \def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
 1365: \let\strong=\b
 1366: 
 1367: % We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
 1368: % the end of a paragraph.  Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
 1369: % group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
 1370: %
 1371: \def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1  \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
 1372: \def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
 1373: 
 1374: \def\t#1{%
 1375:   {\tt \rawbackslash \frenchspacing #1}%
 1376:   \null
 1377: }
 1378: \let\ttfont=\t
 1379: \def\samp#1{`\tclose{#1}'\null}
 1380: \setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
 1381: \font\keysy=cmsy9
 1382: \def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{%
 1383:   \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
 1384:     \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
 1385:      \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
 1386:     \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
 1387:   \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
 1388: % The old definition, with no lozenge:
 1389: %\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null}
 1390: \def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1}
 1391: 
 1392: % @file, @option are the same as @samp.
 1393: \let\file=\samp
 1394: \let\option=\samp
 1395: 
 1396: % @code is a modification of @t,
 1397: % which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text.
 1398: \def\tclose#1{%
 1399:   {%
 1400:     % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
 1401:     \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
 1402:     %
 1403:     % Switch to typewriter.
 1404:     \tt
 1405:     %
 1406:     % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
 1407:     \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
 1408:     %
 1409:     % Turn off hyphenation.
 1410:     \nohyphenation
 1411:     %
 1412:     \rawbackslash
 1413:     \frenchspacing
 1414:     #1%
 1415:   }%
 1416:   \null
 1417: }
 1418: 
 1419: % We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in \code.
 1420: % Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
 1421: % in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
 1422: 
 1423: % Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
 1424: % both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
 1425: % We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
 1426: % and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash.
 1427: %  -- rms.
 1428: {
 1429:   \catcode`\-=\active
 1430:   \catcode`\_=\active
 1431:   %
 1432:   \global\def\code{\begingroup
 1433:     \catcode`\-=\active \let-\codedash
 1434:     \catcode`\_=\active \let_\codeunder
 1435:     \codex
 1436:   }
 1437:   %
 1438:   % If we end up with any active - characters when handling the index,
 1439:   % just treat them as a normal -.
 1440:   \global\def\indexbreaks{\catcode`\-=\active \let-\realdash}
 1441: }
 1442: 
 1443: \def\realdash{-}
 1444: \def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}}
 1445: \def\codeunder{%
 1446:   % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work.  In math mode, _
 1447:   % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.)
 1448:   % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us
 1449:   % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop.
 1450:   \ifusingtt{\ifmmode
 1451:                \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_.
 1452:              \else\normalunderscore \fi
 1453:              \discretionary{}{}{}}%
 1454:             {\_}%
 1455: }
 1456: \def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
 1457: 
 1458: % @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
 1459: % then @kbd has no effect.
 1460: 
 1461: % @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
 1462: %   `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
 1463: %   or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
 1464: \def\kbdinputstyle{\parsearg\kbdinputstylexxx}
 1465: \def\kbdinputstylexxx#1{%
 1466:   \def\arg{#1}%
 1467:   \ifx\arg\worddistinct
 1468:     \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
 1469:   \else\ifx\arg\wordexample
 1470:     \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
 1471:   \else\ifx\arg\wordcode
 1472:     \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
 1473:   \fi\fi\fi
 1474: }
 1475: \def\worddistinct{distinct}
 1476: \def\wordexample{example}
 1477: \def\wordcode{code}
 1478: 
 1479: % Default is kbdinputdistinct.  (Too much of a hassle to call the macro,
 1480: % the catcodes are wrong for parsearg to work.)
 1481: \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}
 1482: 
 1483: \def\xkey{\key}
 1484: \def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
 1485: \ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
 1486: \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi
 1487: \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi}
 1488: 
 1489: % For @url, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code.
 1490: \let\url=\code
 1491: \let\env=\code
 1492: \let\command=\code
 1493: 
 1494: % @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated)
 1495: % second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third
 1496: % arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url
 1497: % itself.  First (mandatory) arg is the url.  Perhaps eventually put in
 1498: % a hypertex \special here.
 1499: %
 1500: \def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish}
 1501: \def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup
 1502:   \unsepspaces
 1503:   \pdfurl{#1}%
 1504:   \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
 1505:   \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
 1506:     \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
 1507:   \else
 1508:     \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
 1509:     \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
 1510:       \ifpdf
 1511:         \unhbox0             % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it
 1512:       \else
 1513:         \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url
 1514:       \fi
 1515:     \else
 1516:       \code{#1}% only url given, so show it
 1517:     \fi
 1518:   \fi
 1519:   \endlink
 1520: \endgroup}
 1521: 
 1522: % rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
 1523: % So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.
 1524: % 
 1525: %\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
 1526: \ifpdf
 1527:   \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish}
 1528:   \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup
 1529:     \unsepspaces
 1530:     \pdfurl{mailto:#1}%
 1531:     \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
 1532:     \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi
 1533:     \endlink
 1534:   \endgroup}
 1535: \else
 1536:   \let\email=\uref
 1537: \fi
 1538: 
 1539: % Check if we are currently using a typewriter font.  Since all the
 1540: % Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
 1541: % shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
 1542: % this property, we can check that font parameter.
 1543: %
 1544: \def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
 1545: 
 1546: % Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'.  The only reason for the
 1547: % argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
 1548: %
 1549: \def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
 1550: 
 1551: \def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par}
 1552: 
 1553: % @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'',
 1554: % and it is not used as such in any manual I can find.  We need it for
 1555: % Polish suppressed-l.  --karl, 22sep96.
 1556: %\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null}
 1557: 
 1558: % Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
 1559: \def\r#1{{\rm #1}}              % roman font
 1560: \def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}}       % smallcaps font
 1561: \def\ii#1{{\it #1}}             % italic font
 1562: 
 1563: % @acronym downcases the argument and prints in smallcaps.
 1564: \def\acronym#1{{\smallcaps \lowercase{#1}}}
 1565: 
 1566: % @pounds{} is a sterling sign.
 1567: \def\pounds{{\it\$}}
 1568: 
 1569: 
 1570: \message{page headings,}
 1571: 
 1572: \newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
 1573: \newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
 1574: 
 1575: % First the title page.  Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
 1576: \newif\ifseenauthor
 1577: \newif\iffinishedtitlepage
 1578: 
 1579: % Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the
 1580: % user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage.
 1581: %
 1582: \newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
 1583:  \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
 1584: \newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
 1585:  \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
 1586: 
 1587: \def\shorttitlepage{\parsearg\shorttitlepagezzz}
 1588: \def\shorttitlepagezzz #1{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
 1589:         \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
 1590: 
 1591: \def\titlepage{\begingroup \parindent=0pt \textfonts
 1592:    \let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
 1593:    \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}%
 1594:    %
 1595:    \def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines}%
 1596:    %
 1597:    % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
 1598:    \vglue\titlepagetopglue
 1599:    %
 1600:    % Now you can print the title using @title.
 1601:    \def\title{\parsearg\titlezzz}%
 1602:    \def\titlezzz##1{\leftline{\titlefonts\rm ##1}
 1603:                     % print a rule at the page bottom also.
 1604:                     \finishedtitlepagefalse
 1605:                     \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt}%
 1606:    % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
 1607:    \finishedtitlepagetrue
 1608:    %
 1609:    % Now you can put text using @subtitle.
 1610:    \def\subtitle{\parsearg\subtitlezzz}%
 1611:    \def\subtitlezzz##1{{\subtitlefont \rightline{##1}}}%
 1612:    %
 1613:    % @author should come last, but may come many times.
 1614:    \def\author{\parsearg\authorzzz}%
 1615:    \def\authorzzz##1{\ifseenauthor\else\vskip 0pt plus 1filll\seenauthortrue\fi
 1616:       {\authorfont \leftline{##1}}}%
 1617:    %
 1618:    % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
 1619:    % at the top of the second.  We don't want the ragged left on the second.
 1620:    \let\oldpage = \page
 1621:    \def\page{%
 1622:       \iffinishedtitlepage\else
 1623:          \finishtitlepage
 1624:       \fi
 1625:       \oldpage
 1626:       \let\page = \oldpage
 1627:       \hbox{}}%
 1628: %   \def\page{\oldpage \hbox{}}
 1629: }
 1630: 
 1631: \def\Etitlepage{%
 1632:    \iffinishedtitlepage\else
 1633:       \finishtitlepage
 1634:    \fi
 1635:    % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
 1636:    % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
 1637:    % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
 1638:    % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
 1639:    \oldpage
 1640:    \endgroup
 1641:    %
 1642:    % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are
 1643:    % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers.
 1644:    \HEADINGSon
 1645:    %
 1646:    % If they want short, they certainly want long too.
 1647:    \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
 1648:      \shortcontents
 1649:      \contents
 1650:      \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
 1651:      \global\let\contents = \relax
 1652:    \fi
 1653:    %
 1654:    \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
 1655:      \contents
 1656:      \global\let\contents = \relax
 1657:      \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
 1658:    \fi
 1659: }
 1660: 
 1661: \def\finishtitlepage{%
 1662:    \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
 1663:    \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
 1664:    \finishedtitlepagetrue
 1665: }
 1666: 
 1667: %%% Set up page headings and footings.
 1668: 
 1669: \let\thispage=\folio
 1670: 
 1671: \newtoks\evenheadline    % headline on even pages
 1672: \newtoks\oddheadline     % headline on odd pages
 1673: \newtoks\evenfootline    % footline on even pages
 1674: \newtoks\oddfootline     % footline on odd pages
 1675: 
 1676: % Now make Tex use those variables
 1677: \headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
 1678:                             \else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
 1679: \footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
 1680:                             \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}
 1681: \let\HEADINGShook=\relax
 1682: 
 1683: % Commands to set those variables.
 1684: % For example, this is what  @headings on  does
 1685: % @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
 1686: % @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
 1687: % @evenfooting @thisfile||
 1688: % @oddfooting ||@thisfile
 1689: 
 1690: \def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
 1691: \def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
 1692: \def\everyheading{\parsearg\everyheadingxxx}
 1693: 
 1694: \def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
 1695: \def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
 1696: \def\everyfooting{\parsearg\everyfootingxxx}
 1697: 
 1698: {\catcode`\@=0 %
 1699: 
 1700: \gdef\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
 1701: \gdef\evenheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
 1702: \global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
 1703: 
 1704: \gdef\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
 1705: \gdef\oddheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
 1706: \global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
 1707: 
 1708: \gdef\everyheadingxxx#1{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
 1709: 
 1710: \gdef\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
 1711: \gdef\evenfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
 1712: \global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
 1713: 
 1714: \gdef\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
 1715: \gdef\oddfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
 1716:   \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
 1717:   %
 1718:   % Leave some space for the footline.  Hopefully ok to assume
 1719:   % @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
 1720:   \global\advance\pageheight by -\baselineskip
 1721:   \global\advance\vsize by -\baselineskip
 1722: }
 1723: 
 1724: \gdef\everyfootingxxx#1{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
 1725: %
 1726: }% unbind the catcode of @.
 1727: 
 1728: % @headings double      turns headings on for double-sided printing.
 1729: % @headings single      turns headings on for single-sided printing.
 1730: % @headings off         turns them off.
 1731: % @headings on          same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
 1732: % @headings after       turns on double-sided headings after this page.
 1733: % @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
 1734: % @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
 1735: % By default, they are off at the start of a document,
 1736: % and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
 1737: 
 1738: \def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
 1739: 
 1740: \def\HEADINGSoff{
 1741: \global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
 1742: \global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}}
 1743: \HEADINGSoff
 1744: % When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
 1745: % For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
 1746: % chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
 1747: % title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
 1748: % edge of all pages.
 1749: \def\HEADINGSdouble{
 1750: \global\pageno=1
 1751: \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
 1752: \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
 1753: \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
 1754: \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
 1755: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
 1756: }
 1757: \let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
 1758: 
 1759: % For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
 1760: % page number on top right.
 1761: \def\HEADINGSsingle{
 1762: \global\pageno=1
 1763: \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
 1764: \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
 1765: \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
 1766: \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
 1767: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
 1768: }
 1769: \def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
 1770: 
 1771: \def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex}
 1772: \let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
 1773: \def\HEADINGSdoublex{%
 1774: \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
 1775: \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
 1776: \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
 1777: \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
 1778: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
 1779: }
 1780: 
 1781: \def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex}
 1782: \def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
 1783: \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
 1784: \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
 1785: \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
 1786: \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
 1787: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
 1788: }
 1789: 
 1790: % Subroutines used in generating headings
 1791: % This produces Day Month Year style of output.
 1792: % Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set
 1793: % up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this).
 1794: \ifx\today\undefined
 1795: \def\today{%
 1796:   \number\day\space
 1797:   \ifcase\month
 1798:   \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr
 1799:   \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug
 1800:   \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec
 1801:   \fi
 1802:   \space\number\year}
 1803: \fi
 1804: 
 1805: % @settitle line...  specifies the title of the document, for headings.
 1806: % It generates no output of its own.
 1807: \def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle}
 1808: \def\settitle{\parsearg\settitlezzz}
 1809: \def\settitlezzz #1{\gdef\thistitle{#1}}
 1810: 
 1811: 
 1812: \message{tables,}
 1813: % Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x), @kitem(x), @xitem(x).
 1814: 
 1815: % default indentation of table text
 1816: \newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
 1817: % default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
 1818: \newdimen\itemindent  \itemindent=.3in
 1819: % margin between end of table item and start of table text.
 1820: \newdimen\itemmargin  \itemmargin=.1in
 1821: 
 1822: % used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
 1823: \newdimen\itemmax
 1824: 
 1825: % Note @table, @vtable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
 1826: % these defs.
 1827: % They also define \itemindex
 1828: % to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
 1829: 
 1830: \newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
 1831: 
 1832: \def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
 1833: 
 1834: \def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
 1835: \def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
 1836: 
 1837: \def\internalBxitem "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \smallbreak \parsearg\xitemzzz}
 1838: \def\internalBxitemx "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \itemxpar \parsearg\xitemzzz}
 1839: 
 1840: \def\internalBkitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\kitemzzz}
 1841: \def\internalBkitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\kitemzzz}
 1842: 
 1843: \def\kitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \lastfunction}}%
 1844:                  \itemzzz {#1}}
 1845: 
 1846: \def\xitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \xitemsubtopic}}%
 1847:                  \itemzzz {#1}}
 1848: 
 1849: \def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
 1850:   \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
 1851:   \advance\hsize by -\tableindent
 1852:   \setbox0=\hbox{\itemfont{#1}}%
 1853:   \itemindex{#1}%
 1854:   \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
 1855:   %
 1856:   % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
 1857:   % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
 1858:   % line.  We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
 1859:   % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
 1860:   % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
 1861:   \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
 1862:     %
 1863:     % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
 1864:     % but leave it ragged-right.
 1865:     \begingroup
 1866:       \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
 1867:       \advance\hsize by\tableindent
 1868:       \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil
 1869:       \leavevmode\unhbox0\par
 1870:     \endgroup
 1871:     %
 1872:     % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
 1873:     % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
 1874:     \nobreak \vskip-\parskip
 1875:     %
 1876:     % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up.  Unfortunately
 1877:     % we can't prevent a possible page break at the following
 1878:     % \baselineskip glue.
 1879:     \nobreak
 1880:     \endgroup
 1881:     \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
 1882:   \else
 1883:     % The item text fits into the space.  Start a paragraph, so that the
 1884:     % following text (if any) will end up on the same line.
 1885:     \noindent
 1886:     % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in
 1887:     % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and
 1888:     % eventually be printed.
 1889:     \nobreak\kern-\tableindent
 1890:     \dimen0 = \itemmax  \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0
 1891:     \unhbox0
 1892:     \nobreak\kern\dimen0
 1893:     \endgroup
 1894:     \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue
 1895:   \fi
 1896: }
 1897: 
 1898: \def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a table}}
 1899: \def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a table}}
 1900: \def\kitem{\errmessage{@kitem while not in a table}}
 1901: \def\kitemx{\errmessage{@kitemx while not in a table}}
 1902: \def\xitem{\errmessage{@xitem while not in a table}}
 1903: \def\xitemx{\errmessage{@xitemx while not in a table}}
 1904: 
 1905: % Contains a kludge to get @end[description] to work.
 1906: \def\description{\tablez{\dontindex}{1}{}{}{}{}}
 1907: 
 1908: % @table, @ftable, @vtable.
 1909: \def\table{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\tablex}
 1910: {\obeylines\obeyspaces%
 1911: \gdef\tablex #1^^M{%
 1912: \tabley\dontindex#1        \endtabley}}
 1913: 
 1914: \def\ftable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\ftablex}
 1915: {\obeylines\obeyspaces%
 1916: \gdef\ftablex #1^^M{%
 1917: \tabley\fnitemindex#1        \endtabley
 1918: \def\Eftable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
 1919: \let\Etable=\relax}}
 1920: 
 1921: \def\vtable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\vtablex}
 1922: {\obeylines\obeyspaces%
 1923: \gdef\vtablex #1^^M{%
 1924: \tabley\vritemindex#1        \endtabley
 1925: \def\Evtable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
 1926: \let\Etable=\relax}}
 1927: 
 1928: \def\dontindex #1{}
 1929: \def\fnitemindex #1{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}}%
 1930: \def\vritemindex #1{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}}%
 1931: 
 1932: {\obeyspaces %
 1933: \gdef\tabley#1#2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7\endtabley{\endgroup%
 1934: \tablez{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}}
 1935: 
 1936: \def\tablez #1#2#3#4#5#6{%
 1937: \aboveenvbreak %
 1938: \begingroup %
 1939: \def\Edescription{\Etable}% Necessary kludge.
 1940: \let\itemindex=#1%
 1941: \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \leftskip by #3\mil \fi %
 1942: \ifnum 0#4>0 \tableindent=#4\mil \fi %
 1943: \ifnum 0#5>0 \advance \rightskip by #5\mil \fi %
 1944: \def\itemfont{#2}%
 1945: \itemmax=\tableindent %
 1946: \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin %
 1947: \advance \leftskip by \tableindent %
 1948: \exdentamount=\tableindent
 1949: \parindent = 0pt
 1950: \parskip = \smallskipamount
 1951: \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi%
 1952: \def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
 1953: \let\item = \internalBitem %
 1954: \let\itemx = \internalBitemx %
 1955: \let\kitem = \internalBkitem %
 1956: \let\kitemx = \internalBkitemx %
 1957: \let\xitem = \internalBxitem %
 1958: \let\xitemx = \internalBxitemx %
 1959: }
 1960: 
 1961: % This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
 1962: 
 1963: \newcount \itemno
 1964: 
 1965: \def\itemize{\parsearg\itemizezzz}
 1966: 
 1967: \def\itemizezzz #1{%
 1968:   \begingroup % ended by the @end itemize
 1969:   \itemizey {#1}{\Eitemize}
 1970: }
 1971: 
 1972: \def\itemizey #1#2{%
 1973: \aboveenvbreak %
 1974: \itemmax=\itemindent %
 1975: \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin %
 1976: \advance \leftskip by \itemindent %
 1977: \exdentamount=\itemindent
 1978: \parindent = 0pt %
 1979: \parskip = \smallskipamount %
 1980: \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi%
 1981: \def#2{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
 1982: \def\itemcontents{#1}%
 1983: \let\item=\itemizeitem}
 1984: 
 1985: % Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
 1986: % These are `.?!:;,'
 1987: \def\frenchspacing{\sfcode46=1000 \sfcode63=1000 \sfcode33=1000
 1988:   \sfcode58=1000 \sfcode59=1000 \sfcode44=1000 }
 1989: 
 1990: % \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
 1991: % TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
 1992: %
 1993: \def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
 1994: 
 1995: % Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
 1996: % or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list.  No
 1997: % argument is the same as `1'.
 1998: %
 1999: \def\enumerate{\parsearg\enumeratezzz}
 2000: \def\enumeratezzz #1{\enumeratey #1  \endenumeratey}
 2001: \def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
 2002:   \begingroup % ended by the @end enumerate
 2003:   %
 2004:   % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
 2005:   \def\thearg{#1}%
 2006:   \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
 2007:   %
 2008:   % Detect if the argument is a single token.  If so, it might be a
 2009:   % letter.  Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
 2010:   % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
 2011:   % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
 2012:   % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
 2013:   \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
 2014:   \ifx\rest\empty
 2015:     % Only one token in the argument.  It could still be anything.
 2016:     % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
 2017:     % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
 2018:     %   not equal to itself.
 2019:     % Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
 2020:     %
 2021:     % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
 2022:     % continuing to look for a <number>.
 2023:     %
 2024:     \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
 2025:       \numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
 2026:     \else
 2027:       % It's a letter.
 2028:       \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
 2029:         \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
 2030:       \else
 2031:         \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
 2032:       \fi
 2033:     \fi
 2034:   \else
 2035:     % Multiple tokens in the argument.  We hope it's a number.
 2036:     \numericenumerate
 2037:   \fi
 2038: }
 2039: 
 2040: % An @enumerate whose labels are integers.  The starting integer is
 2041: % given in \thearg.
 2042: %
 2043: \def\numericenumerate{%
 2044:   \itemno = \thearg
 2045:   \startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
 2046: }
 2047: 
 2048: % The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
 2049: \def\lowercaseenumerate{%
 2050:   \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
 2051:   \startenumeration{%
 2052:     % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
 2053:     \ifnum\itemno=0
 2054:       \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
 2055:                   alphabet}%
 2056:     \fi
 2057:     \char\lccode\itemno
 2058:   }%
 2059: }
 2060: 
 2061: % The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
 2062: \def\uppercaseenumerate{%
 2063:   \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
 2064:   \startenumeration{%
 2065:     % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
 2066:     \ifnum\itemno=0
 2067:       \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
 2068:                   alphabet}
 2069:     \fi
 2070:     \char\uccode\itemno
 2071:   }%
 2072: }
 2073: 
 2074: % Call itemizey, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
 2075: % common last two arguments.  Also subtract one from the initial value in
 2076: % \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
 2077: %
 2078: \def\startenumeration#1{%
 2079:   \advance\itemno by -1
 2080:   \itemizey{#1.}\Eenumerate\flushcr
 2081: }
 2082: 
 2083: % @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
 2084: % to @enumerate.
 2085: %
 2086: \def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}}
 2087: \def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}}
 2088: \def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
 2089: \def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
 2090: 
 2091: % Definition of @item while inside @itemize.
 2092: 
 2093: \def\itemizeitem{%
 2094: \advance\itemno by 1
 2095: {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}%
 2096: \ifhmode \errmessage{In hmode at itemizeitem}\fi
 2097: {\parskip=0in \hskip 0pt
 2098: \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents\hskip \itemmargin}%
 2099: \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}%
 2100: \flushcr}
 2101: 
 2102: % @multitable macros
 2103: % Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
 2104: %
 2105: % @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired.
 2106: % Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble.  Width
 2107: % can be specified either with sample text given in a template line,
 2108: % or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page.
 2109: 
 2110: % Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines.
 2111: 
 2112: % To make preamble:
 2113: %
 2114: % Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize:
 2115: %   @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45
 2116: %   @item ...
 2117: %
 2118: %   Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total
 2119: %   current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many
 2120: %   columns as desired.
 2121: 
 2122: 
 2123: % Or use a template:
 2124: %   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
 2125: %   @item ...
 2126: %   using the widest term desired in each column.
 2127: %
 2128: % For those who want to use more than one line's worth of words in
 2129: % the preamble, break the line within one argument and it
 2130: % will parse correctly, i.e.,
 2131: %
 2132: %     @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3
 2133: %      template}
 2134: % Not:
 2135: %     @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template}
 2136: %      {Column 3 template}
 2137: 
 2138: % Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
 2139: % starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
 2140: % with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
 2141: % ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
 2142: 
 2143: % @item, @tab, @multitable or @end multitable do not need to be on their
 2144: % own lines, but it will not hurt if they are.
 2145: 
 2146: % Sample multitable:
 2147: 
 2148: %   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
 2149: %   @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col
 2150: %   @item
 2151: %   first col stuff
 2152: %   @tab
 2153: %   second col stuff
 2154: %   @tab
 2155: %   third col
 2156: %   @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff
 2157: %   @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column.
 2158: %
 2159: %         They will wrap at the width determined by the template.
 2160: %   @item@tab@tab This will be in third column.
 2161: %   @end multitable
 2162: 
 2163: % Default dimensions may be reset by user.
 2164: % @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table.
 2165: % @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table.
 2166: % @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns.
 2167: % @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline
 2168: %                                                            to baseline.
 2169: %   0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing.
 2170: %
 2171: \newskip\multitableparskip
 2172: \newskip\multitableparindent
 2173: \newdimen\multitablecolspace
 2174: \newskip\multitablelinespace
 2175: \multitableparskip=0pt
 2176: \multitableparindent=6pt
 2177: \multitablecolspace=12pt
 2178: \multitablelinespace=0pt
 2179: 
 2180: % Macros used to set up halign preamble:
 2181: %
 2182: \let\endsetuptable\relax
 2183: \def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
 2184: \let\columnfractions\relax
 2185: \def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
 2186: \newif\ifsetpercent
 2187: 
 2188: % #1 is the part of the @columnfraction before the decimal point, which
 2189: % is presumably either 0 or the empty string (but we don't check, we
 2190: % just throw it away).  #2 is the decimal part, which we use as the
 2191: % percent of \hsize for this column.
 2192: \def\pickupwholefraction#1.#2 {%
 2193:   \global\advance\colcount by 1
 2194:   \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{.#2\hsize}%
 2195:   \setuptable
 2196: }
 2197: 
 2198: \newcount\colcount
 2199: \def\setuptable#1{%
 2200:   \def\firstarg{#1}%
 2201:   \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable
 2202:     \let\go = \relax
 2203:   \else
 2204:     \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions
 2205:       \global\setpercenttrue
 2206:     \else
 2207:       \ifsetpercent
 2208:          \let\go\pickupwholefraction
 2209:       \else
 2210:          \global\advance\colcount by 1
 2211:          \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip }% Add a normal word space as a separator;
 2212:                             % typically that is always in the input, anyway.
 2213:          \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
 2214:       \fi
 2215:     \fi
 2216:     \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction
 2217:       % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so
 2218:       % we'll always have a period there to be parsed.
 2219:       \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}%
 2220:     \else
 2221:       \let\go = \setuptable
 2222:     \fi%
 2223:   \fi
 2224:   \go
 2225: }
 2226: 
 2227: % This used to have \hskip1sp.  But then the space in a template line is
 2228: % not enough.  That is bad.  So let's go back to just & until we
 2229: % encounter the problem it was intended to solve again.
 2230: % --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99.
 2231: \def\tab{&}
 2232: 
 2233: % @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
 2234: %
 2235: \def\multitable{\parsearg\dotable}
 2236: \def\dotable#1{\bgroup
 2237:   \vskip\parskip
 2238:   \let\item\crcr
 2239:   \tolerance=9500
 2240:   \hbadness=9500
 2241:   \setmultitablespacing
 2242:   \parskip=\multitableparskip
 2243:   \parindent=\multitableparindent
 2244:   \overfullrule=0pt
 2245:   \global\colcount=0
 2246:   \def\Emultitable{\global\setpercentfalse\cr\egroup\egroup}%
 2247:   %
 2248:   % To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
 2249:   \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
 2250:   %
 2251:   % \everycr will reset column counter, \colcount, at the end of
 2252:   % each line. Every column entry will cause \colcount to advance by one.
 2253:   % The table preamble
 2254:   % looks at the current \colcount to find the correct column width.
 2255:   \everycr{\noalign{%
 2256:   %
 2257:   % \filbreak%% keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
 2258:   % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the table
 2259:   % breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better?  Wait until the problem
 2260:   % manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
 2261:     \global\colcount=0\relax}}%
 2262:   %
 2263:   % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
 2264:   % be used as many times as user calls for columns.
 2265:   % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
 2266:   % continue for many paragraphs if desired.
 2267:   \halign\bgroup&\global\advance\colcount by 1\relax
 2268:     \multistrut\vtop{\hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
 2269:   %
 2270:   % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
 2271:   % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
 2272:   % the first one.
 2273:   %
 2274:   % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
 2275:   % to the width of each template entry.
 2276:   %
 2277:   % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
 2278:   % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
 2279:   % will keep entries from bumping into each other.  Table will start at
 2280:   % left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
 2281:   %
 2282:   % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
 2283:   \rightskip=0pt
 2284:   \ifnum\colcount=1
 2285:     % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
 2286:     \advance\hsize by\leftskip
 2287:   \else
 2288:     \ifsetpercent \else
 2289:       % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
 2290:       % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
 2291:       \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
 2292:     \fi
 2293:    % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
 2294:   \leftskip=\multitablecolspace
 2295:   \fi
 2296:   % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
 2297:   % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
 2298:   % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
 2299:   % For example:
 2300:   % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
 2301:   % @item @code{#}
 2302:   % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
 2303:   % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively marking
 2304:   % characters.
 2305:   \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut}\cr
 2306: }
 2307: 
 2308: \def\setmultitablespacing{% test to see if user has set \multitablelinespace.
 2309: % If so, do nothing. If not, give it an appropriate dimension based on
 2310: % current baselineskip.
 2311: \ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
 2312: \setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip
 2313: \global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0
 2314: %% strut to put in table in case some entry doesn't have descenders,
 2315: %% to keep lines equally spaced
 2316: \let\multistrut = \strut
 2317: \else
 2318: %% FIXME: what is \box0 supposed to be?
 2319: \gdef\multistrut{\vrule height\multitablelinespace depth\dp0
 2320: width0pt\relax} \fi
 2321: %% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
 2322: %% table. If not, do nothing.
 2323: %%        If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
 2324: \ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace
 2325: \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
 2326: \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
 2327:                                       %% than skip between lines in the table.
 2328: \fi%
 2329: \ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt
 2330: \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
 2331: \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
 2332:                                       %% than skip between lines in the table.
 2333: \fi}
 2334: 
 2335: 
 2336: \message{conditionals,}
 2337: % Prevent errors for section commands.
 2338: % Used in @ignore and in failing conditionals.
 2339: \def\ignoresections{%
 2340:   \let\chapter=\relax
 2341:   \let\unnumbered=\relax
 2342:   \let\top=\relax
 2343:   \let\unnumberedsec=\relax
 2344:   \let\unnumberedsection=\relax
 2345:   \let\unnumberedsubsec=\relax
 2346:   \let\unnumberedsubsection=\relax
 2347:   \let\unnumberedsubsubsec=\relax
 2348:   \let\unnumberedsubsubsection=\relax
 2349:   \let\section=\relax
 2350:   \let\subsec=\relax
 2351:   \let\subsubsec=\relax
 2352:   \let\subsection=\relax
 2353:   \let\subsubsection=\relax
 2354:   \let\appendix=\relax
 2355:   \let\appendixsec=\relax
 2356:   \let\appendixsection=\relax
 2357:   \let\appendixsubsec=\relax
 2358:   \let\appendixsubsection=\relax
 2359:   \let\appendixsubsubsec=\relax
 2360:   \let\appendixsubsubsection=\relax
 2361:   \let\contents=\relax
 2362:   \let\smallbook=\relax
 2363:   \let\titlepage=\relax
 2364: }
 2365: 
 2366: % Used in nested conditionals, where we have to parse the Texinfo source
 2367: % and so want to turn off most commands, in case they are used
 2368: % incorrectly.
 2369: %
 2370: \def\ignoremorecommands{%
 2371:   \let\defcodeindex = \relax
 2372:   \let\defcv = \relax
 2373:   \let\deffn = \relax
 2374:   \let\deffnx = \relax
 2375:   \let\defindex = \relax
 2376:   \let\defivar = \relax
 2377:   \let\defmac = \relax
 2378:   \let\defmethod = \relax
 2379:   \let\defop = \relax
 2380:   \let\defopt = \relax
 2381:   \let\defspec = \relax
 2382:   \let\deftp = \relax
 2383:   \let\deftypefn = \relax
 2384:   \let\deftypefun = \relax
 2385:   \let\deftypeivar = \relax
 2386:   \let\deftypeop = \relax
 2387:   \let\deftypevar = \relax
 2388:   \let\deftypevr = \relax
 2389:   \let\defun = \relax
 2390:   \let\defvar = \relax
 2391:   \let\defvr = \relax
 2392:   \let\ref = \relax
 2393:   \let\xref = \relax
 2394:   \let\printindex = \relax
 2395:   \let\pxref = \relax
 2396:   \let\settitle = \relax
 2397:   \let\setchapternewpage = \relax
 2398:   \let\setchapterstyle = \relax
 2399:   \let\everyheading = \relax
 2400:   \let\evenheading = \relax
 2401:   \let\oddheading = \relax
 2402:   \let\everyfooting = \relax
 2403:   \let\evenfooting = \relax
 2404:   \let\oddfooting = \relax
 2405:   \let\headings = \relax
 2406:   \let\include = \relax
 2407:   \let\lowersections = \relax
 2408:   \let\down = \relax
 2409:   \let\raisesections = \relax
 2410:   \let\up = \relax
 2411:   \let\set = \relax
 2412:   \let\clear = \relax
 2413:   \let\item = \relax
 2414: }
 2415: 
 2416: % Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, @ifplaintext, @ifnottex, @html, @menu,
 2417: % @direntry, and @documentdescription.
 2418: %
 2419: \def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
 2420: \def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
 2421: \def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
 2422: \def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}}
 2423: \def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
 2424: \def\html{\doignore{html}}
 2425: \def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
 2426: \def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
 2427: \def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}}
 2428: \def\documentdescriptionword{documentdescription}
 2429: 
 2430: % @dircategory CATEGORY  -- specify a category of the dir file
 2431: % which this file should belong to.  Ignore this in TeX.
 2432: \let\dircategory = \comment
 2433: 
 2434: % Ignore text until a line `@end #1'.
 2435: %
 2436: \def\doignore#1{\begingroup
 2437:   % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer.
 2438:   \ignoresections
 2439:   %
 2440:   % Define a command to swallow text until we reach `@end #1'.
 2441:   % This @ is a catcode 12 token (that is the normal catcode of @ in
 2442:   % this texinfo.tex file).  We change the catcode of @ below to match.
 2443:   \long\def\doignoretext##1@end #1{\enddoignore}%
 2444:   %
 2445:   % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
 2446:   \catcode32 = 10
 2447:   %
 2448:   % Ignore braces, too, so mismatched braces don't cause trouble.
 2449:   \catcode`\{ = 9
 2450:   \catcode`\} = 9
 2451:   %
 2452:   % We must not have @c interpreted as a control sequence.
 2453:   \catcode`\@ = 12
 2454:   %
 2455:   \def\ignoreword{#1}%
 2456:   \ifx\ignoreword\documentdescriptionword
 2457:     % The c kludge breaks documentdescription, since
 2458:     % `documentdescription' contains a `c'.  Means not everything will
 2459:     % be ignored inside @documentdescription, but oh well...
 2460:   \else
 2461:     % Make the letter c a comment character so that the rest of the line
 2462:     % will be ignored. This way, the document can have (for example)
 2463:     %   @c @end ifinfo
 2464:     % and the @end ifinfo will be properly ignored.
 2465:     % (We've just changed @ to catcode 12.)
 2466:     \catcode`\c = 14
 2467:   \fi
 2468:   %
 2469:   % And now expand the command defined above.
 2470:   \doignoretext
 2471: }
 2472: 
 2473: % What we do to finish off ignored text.
 2474: %
 2475: \def\enddoignore{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
 2476: 
 2477: \newif\ifwarnedobs\warnedobsfalse
 2478: \def\obstexwarn{%
 2479:   \ifwarnedobs\relax\else
 2480:   % We need to warn folks that they may have trouble with TeX 3.0.
 2481:   % This uses \immediate\write16 rather than \message to get newlines.
 2482:     \immediate\write16{}
 2483:     \immediate\write16{WARNING: for users of Unix TeX 3.0!}
 2484:     \immediate\write16{This manual trips a bug in TeX version 3.0 (tex hangs).}
 2485:     \immediate\write16{If you are running another version of TeX, relax.}
 2486:     \immediate\write16{If you are running Unix TeX 3.0, kill this TeX process.}
 2487:     \immediate\write16{  Then upgrade your TeX installation if you can.}
 2488:     \immediate\write16{  (See ftp://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/TeX.README.)}
 2489:     \immediate\write16{If you are stuck with version 3.0, run the}
 2490:     \immediate\write16{  script ``tex3patch'' from the Texinfo distribution}
 2491:     \immediate\write16{  to use a workaround.}
 2492:     \immediate\write16{}
 2493:     \global\warnedobstrue
 2494:     \fi
 2495: }
 2496: 
 2497: % **In TeX 3.0, setting text in \nullfont hangs tex.  For a
 2498: % workaround (which requires the file ``dummy.tfm'' to be installed),
 2499: % uncomment the following line:
 2500: %%%%%\font\nullfont=dummy\let\obstexwarn=\relax
 2501: 
 2502: % Ignore text, except that we keep track of conditional commands for
 2503: % purposes of nesting, up to an `@end #1' command.
 2504: %
 2505: \def\nestedignore#1{%
 2506:   \obstexwarn
 2507:   % We must actually expand the ignored text to look for the @end
 2508:   % command, so that nested ignore constructs work.  Thus, we put the
 2509:   % text into a \vbox and then do nothing with the result.  To minimize
 2510:   % the change of memory overflow, we follow the approach outlined on
 2511:   % page 401 of the TeXbook: make the current font be a dummy font.
 2512:   %
 2513:   \setbox0 = \vbox\bgroup
 2514:     % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer.
 2515:     \ignoresections
 2516:     %
 2517:     % Define `@end #1' to end the box, which will in turn undefine the
 2518:     % @end command again.
 2519:     \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\egroup\ignorespaces}%
 2520:     %
 2521:     % We are going to be parsing Texinfo commands.  Most cause no
 2522:     % trouble when they are used incorrectly, but some commands do
 2523:     % complicated argument parsing or otherwise get confused, so we
 2524:     % undefine them.
 2525:     %
 2526:     % We can't do anything about stray @-signs, unfortunately;
 2527:     % they'll produce `undefined control sequence' errors.
 2528:     \ignoremorecommands
 2529:     %
 2530:     % Set the current font to be \nullfont, a TeX primitive, and define
 2531:     % all the font commands to also use \nullfont.  We don't use
 2532:     % dummy.tfm, as suggested in the TeXbook, because not all sites
 2533:     % might have that installed.  Therefore, math mode will still
 2534:     % produce output, but that should be an extremely small amount of
 2535:     % stuff compared to the main input.
 2536:     %
 2537:     \nullfont
 2538:     \let\tenrm=\nullfont \let\tenit=\nullfont \let\tensl=\nullfont
 2539:     \let\tenbf=\nullfont \let\tentt=\nullfont \let\smallcaps=\nullfont
 2540:     \let\tensf=\nullfont
 2541:     % Similarly for index fonts.
 2542:     \let\smallrm=\nullfont \let\smallit=\nullfont \let\smallsl=\nullfont
 2543:     \let\smallbf=\nullfont \let\smalltt=\nullfont \let\smallsc=\nullfont
 2544:     \let\smallsf=\nullfont
 2545:     % Similarly for smallexample fonts.
 2546:     \let\smallerrm=\nullfont \let\smallerit=\nullfont \let\smallersl=\nullfont
 2547:     \let\smallerbf=\nullfont \let\smallertt=\nullfont \let\smallersc=\nullfont
 2548:     \let\smallersf=\nullfont
 2549:     %
 2550:     % Don't complain when characters are missing from the fonts.
 2551:     \tracinglostchars = 0
 2552:     %
 2553:     % Don't bother to do space factor calculations.
 2554:     \frenchspacing
 2555:     %
 2556:     % Don't report underfull hboxes.
 2557:     \hbadness = 10000
 2558:     %
 2559:     % Do minimal line-breaking.
 2560:     \pretolerance = 10000
 2561:     %
 2562:     % Do not execute instructions in @tex
 2563:     \def\tex{\doignore{tex}}%
 2564:     % Do not execute macro definitions.
 2565:     % `c' is a comment character, so the word `macro' will get cut off.
 2566:     \def\macro{\doignore{ma}}%
 2567: }
 2568: 
 2569: % @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
 2570: % @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
 2571: %
 2572: % Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
 2573: % empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
 2574: % own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
 2575: % didn't need it.  Make sure the catcode of space is correct to avoid
 2576: % losing inside @example, for instance.
 2577: %
 2578: \def\set{\begingroup\catcode` =10
 2579:   \catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12 % Allow - and _ in VAR.
 2580:   \parsearg\setxxx}
 2581: \def\setxxx#1{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
 2582: \def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
 2583:   \def\temp{#2}%
 2584:   \ifx\temp\empty \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname = \empty
 2585:   \else \setzzz{#1}#2\endsetzzz % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
 2586:   \fi
 2587:   \endgroup
 2588: }
 2589: % Can't use \xdef to pre-expand #2 and save some time, since \temp or
 2590: % \next or other control sequences that we've defined might get us into
 2591: % an infinite loop. Consider `@set foo @cite{bar}'.
 2592: \def\setzzz#1#2 \endsetzzz{\expandafter\gdef\csname SET#1\endcsname{#2}}
 2593: 
 2594: % @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
 2595: %
 2596: \def\clear{\parsearg\clearxxx}
 2597: \def\clearxxx#1{\global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax}
 2598: 
 2599: % @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
 2600: {
 2601:   \catcode`\_ = \active
 2602:   %
 2603:   % We might end up with active _ or - characters in the argument if
 2604:   % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}.  So \let any
 2605:   % such active characters to their normal equivalents.
 2606:   \gdef\value{\begingroup
 2607:     \catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12
 2608:     \indexbreaks \let_\normalunderscore
 2609:     \valuexxx}
 2610: }
 2611: \def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
 2612: 
 2613: % We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's
 2614: % properly in indexes (we \let\value to this in \indexdummies).  Ones
 2615: % whose names contain - or _ still won't work, but we can't do anything
 2616: % about that.  The command has to be fully expandable, since the result
 2617: % winds up in the index file.  This means that if the variable's value
 2618: % contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain it will fail
 2619: % (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work to do a
 2620: % one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete).
 2621: %
 2622: \def\expandablevalue#1{%
 2623:   \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
 2624:     {[No value for ``#1'']}%
 2625:   \else
 2626:     \csname SET#1\endcsname
 2627:   \fi
 2628: }
 2629: 
 2630: % @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
 2631: % with @set.
 2632: %
 2633: \def\ifset{\parsearg\ifsetxxx}
 2634: \def\ifsetxxx #1{%
 2635:   \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
 2636:     \expandafter\ifsetfail
 2637:   \else
 2638:     \expandafter\ifsetsucceed
 2639:   \fi
 2640: }
 2641: \def\ifsetsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifset}}
 2642: \def\ifsetfail{\nestedignore{ifset}}
 2643: \defineunmatchedend{ifset}
 2644: 
 2645: % @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been
 2646: % defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
 2647: %
 2648: \def\ifclear{\parsearg\ifclearxxx}
 2649: \def\ifclearxxx #1{%
 2650:   \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
 2651:     \expandafter\ifclearsucceed
 2652:   \else
 2653:     \expandafter\ifclearfail
 2654:   \fi
 2655: }
 2656: \def\ifclearsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifclear}}
 2657: \def\ifclearfail{\nestedignore{ifclear}}
 2658: \defineunmatchedend{ifclear}
 2659: 
 2660: % @iftex, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext always succeed; we
 2661: % read the text following, through the first @end iftex (etc.).  Make
 2662: % `@end iftex' (etc.) valid only after an @iftex.
 2663: %
 2664: \def\iftex{\conditionalsucceed{iftex}}
 2665: \def\ifnothtml{\conditionalsucceed{ifnothtml}}
 2666: \def\ifnotinfo{\conditionalsucceed{ifnotinfo}}
 2667: \def\ifnotplaintext{\conditionalsucceed{ifnotplaintext}}
 2668: \defineunmatchedend{iftex}
 2669: \defineunmatchedend{ifnothtml}
 2670: \defineunmatchedend{ifnotinfo}
 2671: \defineunmatchedend{ifnotplaintext}
 2672: 
 2673: % We can't just want to start a group at @iftex (etc.) and end it at
 2674: % @end iftex, since then @set commands inside the conditional have no
 2675: % effect (they'd get reverted at the end of the group).  So we must
 2676: % define \Eiftex to redefine itself to be its previous value.  (We can't
 2677: % just define it to fail again with an ``unmatched end'' error, since
 2678: % the @ifset might be nested.)
 2679: %
 2680: \def\conditionalsucceed#1{%
 2681:   \edef\temp{%
 2682:     % Remember the current value of \E#1.
 2683:     \let\nece{prevE#1} = \nece{E#1}%
 2684:     %
 2685:     % At the `@end #1', redefine \E#1 to be its previous value.
 2686:     \def\nece{E#1}{\let\nece{E#1} = \nece{prevE#1}}%
 2687:   }%
 2688:   \temp
 2689: }
 2690: 
 2691: % We need to expand lots of \csname's, but we don't want to expand the
 2692: % control sequences after we've constructed them.
 2693: %
 2694: \def\nece#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
 2695: 
 2696: % @defininfoenclose.
 2697: \let\definfoenclose=\comment
 2698: 
 2699: 
 2700: \message{indexing,}
 2701: % Index generation facilities
 2702: 
 2703: % Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
 2704: % except not \outer, so it can be used within \newindex.
 2705: {\catcode`\@=11
 2706: \gdef\newwrite{\alloc@7\write\chardef\sixt@@n}}
 2707: 
 2708: % \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
 2709: % It automatically defines \fooindex such that
 2710: % \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo.
 2711: % It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for
 2712: % the file that accumulates this index.  The file's extension is foo.
 2713: % The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
 2714: % for the sake of vms.
 2715: %
 2716: \def\newindex#1{%
 2717:   \iflinks
 2718:     \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
 2719:     \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file
 2720:   \fi
 2721:   \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%     % Define @#1index
 2722:     \noexpand\doindex{#1}}
 2723: }
 2724: 
 2725: % @defindex foo  ==  \newindex{foo}
 2726: %
 2727: \def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
 2728: 
 2729: % Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
 2730: %
 2731: \def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
 2732: %
 2733: \def\newcodeindex#1{%
 2734:   \iflinks
 2735:     \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
 2736:     \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1
 2737:   \fi
 2738:   \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%
 2739:     \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}%
 2740: }
 2741: 
 2742: 
 2743: % @synindex foo bar    makes index foo feed into index bar.
 2744: % Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
 2745: % 
 2746: % @syncodeindex foo bar   similar, but put all entries made for index foo
 2747: % inside @code.
 2748: % 
 2749: \def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}}
 2750: \def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}}
 2751: 
 2752: % #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo),
 2753: % #3 the target index (bar).
 2754: \def\dosynindex#1#2#3{%
 2755:   % Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up
 2756:   % closing the target index.
 2757:   \expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \undefined
 2758:     % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the
 2759:     % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files.
 2760:     \expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname
 2761:     \expandafter\let\csname\donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1
 2762:   \fi
 2763:   % redefine \fooindfile:
 2764:   \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname
 2765:   \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp
 2766:   % redefine \fooindex:
 2767:   \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}%
 2768: }
 2769: 
 2770: % Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros.
 2771: % Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
 2772: %  and it is "foo", the name of the index.
 2773: 
 2774: % \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work.
 2775: % This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros.
 2776: 
 2777: % There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
 2778: % which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index.
 2779: 
 2780: \def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer}
 2781: \def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
 2782: 
 2783: % like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
 2784: \def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer}
 2785: \def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
 2786: 
 2787: % Take care of texinfo commands likely to appear in an index entry.
 2788: % (Must be a way to avoid doing expansion at all, and thus not have to
 2789: % laboriously list every single command here.)
 2790: % 
 2791: \def\indexdummies{%
 2792: \def\ { }%
 2793: \def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in aux files.
 2794: % Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again.
 2795: % But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes
 2796: % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters.  
 2797: \let\{ = \mylbrace
 2798: \let\} = \myrbrace
 2799: \def\_{{\realbackslash _}}%
 2800: \normalturnoffactive
 2801: %
 2802: % Take care of the plain tex accent commands.
 2803: \def\,##1{\realbackslash ,{##1}}%
 2804: \def\"{\realbackslash "}%
 2805: \def\`{\realbackslash `}%
 2806: \def\'{\realbackslash '}%
 2807: \def\^{\realbackslash ^}%
 2808: \def\~{\realbackslash ~}%
 2809: \def\={\realbackslash =}%
 2810: \def\b{\realbackslash b}%
 2811: \def\c{\realbackslash c}%
 2812: \def\d{\realbackslash d}%
 2813: \def\u{\realbackslash u}%
 2814: \def\v{\realbackslash v}%
 2815: \def\H{\realbackslash H}%
 2816: \def\dotless##1{\realbackslash dotless {##1}}%
 2817: % Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters.
 2818: \def\AA{\realbackslash AA}%
 2819: \def\AE{\realbackslash AE}%
 2820: \def\L{\realbackslash L}%
 2821: \def\OE{\realbackslash OE}%
 2822: \def\O{\realbackslash O}%
 2823: \def\aa{\realbackslash aa}%
 2824: \def\ae{\realbackslash ae}%
 2825: \def\l{\realbackslash l}%
 2826: \def\oe{\realbackslash oe}%
 2827: \def\o{\realbackslash o}%
 2828: \def\ss{\realbackslash ss}%
 2829: %
 2830: % Although these internals commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do.
 2831: \def\bf{\realbackslash bf }%
 2832: \def\gtr{\realbackslash gtr}%
 2833: \def\hat{\realbackslash hat}%
 2834: \def\less{\realbackslash less}%
 2835: %\def\rm{\realbackslash rm }%
 2836: \def\sf{\realbackslash sf}%
 2837: \def\sl{\realbackslash sl }%
 2838: \def\tclose##1{\realbackslash tclose {##1}}%
 2839: \def\tt{\realbackslash tt}%
 2840: %
 2841: \def\b##1{\realbackslash b {##1}}%
 2842: \def\i##1{\realbackslash i {##1}}%
 2843: \def\sc##1{\realbackslash sc {##1}}%
 2844: \def\t##1{\realbackslash t {##1}}%
 2845: \def\r##1{\realbackslash r {##1}}%
 2846: %
 2847: \def\TeX{\realbackslash TeX}%
 2848: \def\acronym##1{\realbackslash acronym {##1}}%
 2849: \def\cite##1{\realbackslash cite {##1}}%
 2850: \def\code##1{\realbackslash code {##1}}%
 2851: \def\command##1{\realbackslash command {##1}}%
 2852: \def\dfn##1{\realbackslash dfn {##1}}%
 2853: \def\dots{\realbackslash dots }%
 2854: \def\emph##1{\realbackslash emph {##1}}%
 2855: \def\env##1{\realbackslash env {##1}}%
 2856: \def\file##1{\realbackslash file {##1}}%
 2857: \def\kbd##1{\realbackslash kbd {##1}}%
 2858: \def\key##1{\realbackslash key {##1}}%
 2859: \def\math##1{\realbackslash math {##1}}%
 2860: \def\option##1{\realbackslash option {##1}}%
 2861: \def\samp##1{\realbackslash samp {##1}}%
 2862: \def\strong##1{\realbackslash strong {##1}}%
 2863: \def\uref##1{\realbackslash uref {##1}}%
 2864: \def\url##1{\realbackslash url {##1}}%
 2865: \def\var##1{\realbackslash var {##1}}%
 2866: \def\w{\realbackslash w }%
 2867: %
 2868: % These math commands don't seem likely to be used in index entries.
 2869: \def\copyright{\realbackslash copyright}%
 2870: \def\equiv{\realbackslash equiv}%
 2871: \def\error{\realbackslash error}%
 2872: \def\expansion{\realbackslash expansion}%
 2873: \def\point{\realbackslash point}%
 2874: \def\print{\realbackslash print}%
 2875: \def\result{\realbackslash result}%
 2876: %
 2877: % Handle some cases of @value -- where the variable name does not
 2878: % contain - or _, and the value does not contain any
 2879: % (non-fully-expandable) commands.
 2880: \let\value = \expandablevalue
 2881: %
 2882: \unsepspaces
 2883: % Turn off macro expansion
 2884: \turnoffmacros
 2885: }
 2886: 
 2887: % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
 2888: % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
 2889: % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
 2890: {\obeyspaces
 2891:  \gdef\unsepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\space}}
 2892: 
 2893: % \indexnofonts no-ops all font-change commands.
 2894: % This is used when outputting the strings to sort the index by.
 2895: \def\indexdummyfont#1{#1}
 2896: \def\indexdummytex{TeX}
 2897: \def\indexdummydots{...}
 2898: 
 2899: \def\indexnofonts{%
 2900: \def\@{@}%
 2901: % how to handle braces?
 2902: \def\_{\normalunderscore}%
 2903: %
 2904: \let\,=\indexdummyfont
 2905: \let\"=\indexdummyfont
 2906: \let\`=\indexdummyfont
 2907: \let\'=\indexdummyfont
 2908: \let\^=\indexdummyfont
 2909: \let\~=\indexdummyfont
 2910: \let\==\indexdummyfont
 2911: \let\b=\indexdummyfont
 2912: \let\c=\indexdummyfont
 2913: \let\d=\indexdummyfont
 2914: \let\u=\indexdummyfont
 2915: \let\v=\indexdummyfont
 2916: \let\H=\indexdummyfont
 2917: \let\dotless=\indexdummyfont
 2918: % Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters.
 2919: \def\AA{AA}%
 2920: \def\AE{AE}%
 2921: \def\L{L}%
 2922: \def\OE{OE}%
 2923: \def\O{O}%
 2924: \def\aa{aa}%
 2925: \def\ae{ae}%
 2926: \def\l{l}%
 2927: \def\oe{oe}%
 2928: \def\o{o}%
 2929: \def\ss{ss}%
 2930: %
 2931: % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
 2932: % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc.
 2933: % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands.
 2934: %\let\tt=\indexdummyfont
 2935: %
 2936: \let\b=\indexdummyfont
 2937: \let\i=\indexdummyfont
 2938: \let\r=\indexdummyfont
 2939: \let\sc=\indexdummyfont
 2940: \let\t=\indexdummyfont
 2941: %
 2942: \let\TeX=\indexdummytex
 2943: \let\acronym=\indexdummyfont
 2944: \let\cite=\indexdummyfont
 2945: \let\code=\indexdummyfont
 2946: \let\command=\indexdummyfont
 2947: \let\dfn=\indexdummyfont
 2948: \let\dots=\indexdummydots
 2949: \let\emph=\indexdummyfont
 2950: \let\env=\indexdummyfont
 2951: \let\file=\indexdummyfont
 2952: \let\kbd=\indexdummyfont
 2953: \let\key=\indexdummyfont
 2954: \let\math=\indexdummyfont
 2955: \let\option=\indexdummyfont
 2956: \let\samp=\indexdummyfont
 2957: \let\strong=\indexdummyfont
 2958: \let\uref=\indexdummyfont
 2959: \let\url=\indexdummyfont
 2960: \let\var=\indexdummyfont
 2961: \let\w=\indexdummyfont
 2962: }
 2963: 
 2964: % To define \realbackslash, we must make \ not be an escape.
 2965: % We must first make another character (@) an escape
 2966: % so we do not become unable to do a definition.
 2967: 
 2968: {\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\other
 2969:  @gdef@realbackslash{\}}
 2970: 
 2971: \let\indexbackslash=0  %overridden during \printindex.
 2972: \let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?
 2973: 
 2974: % For \ifx comparisons.
 2975: \def\emptymacro{\empty}
 2976: 
 2977: % Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.
 2978: %
 2979: \def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}\empty}
 2980: 
 2981: % Workhorse for all \fooindexes.
 2982: % #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --
 2983: % \empty if called from \doind, as we usually are.  The main exception
 2984: % is with defuns, which call us directly.
 2985: %
 2986: \def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
 2987:   % Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
 2988:   \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
 2989:     \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt #2}}%
 2990:   \fi
 2991:   {%
 2992:     \count255=\lastpenalty
 2993:     {%
 2994:       \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
 2995:       \escapechar=`\\
 2996:       {%
 2997:         \let\folio = 0% We will expand all macros now EXCEPT \folio.
 2998:         \def\rawbackslashxx{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
 2999:         % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
 3000:         %
 3001:         \def\thirdarg{#3}%
 3002:         %
 3003:         % If third arg is present, precede it with space in sort key.
 3004:         \ifx\thirdarg\emptymacro
 3005:           \let\subentry = \empty
 3006:         \else
 3007:           \def\subentry{ #3}%
 3008:         \fi
 3009:         %
 3010:         % First process the index entry with all font commands turned
 3011:         % off to get the string to sort by.
 3012:         {\indexnofonts \xdef\indexsorttmp{#2\subentry}}%
 3013:         %
 3014:         % Now the real index entry with the fonts.
 3015:         \toks0 = {#2}%
 3016:         %
 3017:         % If the third (subentry) arg is present, add it to the index
 3018:         % line to write.
 3019:         \ifx\thirdarg\emptymacro \else
 3020:           \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0{#3}}%
 3021:         \fi
 3022:         %
 3023:         % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and
 3024:         % the original text, including any font commands.  We write
 3025:         % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the
 3026:         % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s
 3027:         % sorted result.
 3028:         \edef\temp{%
 3029:           \write\csname#1indfile\endcsname{%
 3030:             \realbackslash entry{\indexsorttmp}{\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
 3031:         }%
 3032:         %
 3033:         % If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
 3034:         % by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
 3035:         % the skip again.  Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
 3036:         % \write will make \lastskip zero.  The result is that sequences
 3037:         % like this:
 3038:         % @end defun
 3039:         % @tindex whatever
 3040:         % @defun ...
 3041:         % will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
 3042:         % start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
 3043:         % the previous defun.
 3044:         %
 3045:         % But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode.  We
 3046:         % don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
 3047:         %
 3048:         % Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
 3049:         %
 3050:         \iflinks
 3051:           \ifvmode
 3052:             \skip0 = \lastskip
 3053:             \ifdim\lastskip = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip-\lastskip \fi
 3054:           \fi
 3055:           %
 3056:           \temp % do the write
 3057:           %
 3058:           %
 3059:           \ifvmode \ifdim\skip0 = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip\skip0 \fi \fi
 3060:         \fi
 3061:       }%
 3062:     }%
 3063:     \penalty\count255
 3064:   }%
 3065: }
 3066: 
 3067: % The index entry written in the file actually looks like
 3068: %  \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
 3069: % or
 3070: %  \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
 3071: % The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
 3072: % containing these kinds of lines:
 3073: %  \initial {c}
 3074: %     before the first topic whose initial is c
 3075: %  \entry {topic}{pagelist}
 3076: %     for a topic that is used without subtopics
 3077: %  \primary {topic}
 3078: %     for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
 3079: %  \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
 3080: %     for each subtopic.
 3081: 
 3082: % Define the user-accessible indexing commands
 3083: % @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
 3084: 
 3085: \def\findex {\fnindex}
 3086: \def\kindex {\kyindex}
 3087: \def\cindex {\cpindex}
 3088: \def\vindex {\vrindex}
 3089: \def\tindex {\tpindex}
 3090: \def\pindex {\pgindex}
 3091: 
 3092: \def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub}
 3093: {\obeylines %
 3094: \gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup %
 3095: \dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}}
 3096: 
 3097: % Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
 3098: 
 3099: % @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
 3100: % It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
 3101: %
 3102: \def\printindex{\parsearg\doprintindex}
 3103: \def\doprintindex#1{\begingroup
 3104:   \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
 3105:   %
 3106:   \smallfonts \rm
 3107:   \tolerance = 9500
 3108:   \indexbreaks
 3109:   %
 3110:   % See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
 3111:   % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains
 3112:   % \initial {@}
 3113:   % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces
 3114:   % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence).
 3115:   \catcode`\@ = 11
 3116:   \openin 1 \jobname.#1s
 3117:   \ifeof 1
 3118:     % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
 3119:     % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
 3120:     % index.  The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
 3121:     % there is some text.
 3122:     \putwordIndexNonexistent
 3123:   \else
 3124:     %
 3125:     % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
 3126:     % false.  We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
 3127:     % it can discover if there is anything in it.
 3128:     \read 1 to \temp
 3129:     \ifeof 1
 3130:       \putwordIndexIsEmpty
 3131:     \else
 3132:       % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
 3133:       % character.  It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
 3134:       % to make right now.
 3135:       \def\indexbackslash{\rawbackslashxx}%
 3136:       \catcode`\\ = 0
 3137:       \escapechar = `\\
 3138:       \begindoublecolumns
 3139:       \input \jobname.#1s
 3140:       \enddoublecolumns
 3141:     \fi
 3142:   \fi
 3143:   \closein 1
 3144: \endgroup}
 3145: 
 3146: % These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
 3147: % Change them to control the appearance of the index.
 3148: 
 3149: \def\initial#1{{%
 3150:   % Some minor font changes for the special characters.
 3151:   \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt
 3152:   %
 3153:   % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own.
 3154:   \removelastskip
 3155:   %
 3156:   % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
 3157:   \penalty -300
 3158:   %
 3159:   % Typeset the initial.  Making this add up to a whole number of
 3160:   % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
 3161:   % to column.  It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch
 3162:   % we need before each entry, but it's better.
 3163:   %
 3164:   % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
 3165:   \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip
 3166:   \leftline{\secbf #1}%
 3167:   \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
 3168:   %
 3169:   % Do our best not to break after the initial.
 3170:   \nobreak
 3171: }}
 3172: 
 3173: % This typesets a paragraph consisting of #1, dot leaders, and then #2
 3174: % flush to the right margin.  It is used for index and table of contents
 3175: % entries.  The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
 3176: %
 3177: \def\entry#1#2{\begingroup
 3178:   %
 3179:   % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
 3180:   % affect previous text.
 3181:   \par
 3182:   %
 3183:   % Do not fill out the last line with white space.
 3184:   \parfillskip = 0in
 3185:   %
 3186:   % No extra space above this paragraph.
 3187:   \parskip = 0in
 3188:   %
 3189:   % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
 3190:   \finalhyphendemerits = 0
 3191:   %
 3192:   % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
 3193:   % don't both fit on one line.  In that case, bob suggests starting the
 3194:   % dots pretty far over on the line.  Unfortunately, a large
 3195:   % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
 3196:   % lines.  So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
 3197:   %
 3198:   % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
 3199:   % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
 3200:   \hangindent = 2em
 3201:   %
 3202:   % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
 3203:   % with blank space.
 3204:   \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
 3205:   %
 3206:   % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing columns.
 3207:   \vskip 0pt plus1pt
 3208:   %
 3209:   % Start a ``paragraph'' for the index entry so the line breaking
 3210:   % parameters we've set above will have an effect.
 3211:   \noindent
 3212:   %
 3213:   % Insert the text of the index entry.  TeX will do line-breaking on it.
 3214:   #1%
 3215:   % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
 3216:   % there are no page numbers.  The next person who breaks this will be
 3217:   % cursed by a Unix daemon.
 3218:   \def\tempa{{\rm }}%
 3219:   \def\tempb{#2}%
 3220:   \edef\tempc{\tempa}%
 3221:   \edef\tempd{\tempb}%
 3222:   \ifx\tempc\tempd\ \else%
 3223:     %
 3224:     % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
 3225:     % this line with blank space.  (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
 3226:     % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
 3227:     \hfil\penalty50
 3228:     \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
 3229:     %
 3230:     % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
 3231:     % part of (the primitive) \par.  Without it, a spurious underfull
 3232:     % \hbox ensues.
 3233:     \ifpdf
 3234:       \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
 3235:     \else
 3236:       \ #2% The page number ends the paragraph.
 3237:     \fi
 3238:   \fi%
 3239:   \par
 3240: \endgroup}
 3241: 
 3242: % Like \dotfill except takes at least 1 em.
 3243: \def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
 3244:   \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu ${\it .}$ \mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill}
 3245: 
 3246: \def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
 3247: 
 3248: \newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm
 3249: \def\secondary#1#2{{%
 3250:   \parfillskip=0in
 3251:   \parskip=0in
 3252:   \hangindent=1in
 3253:   \hangafter=1
 3254:   \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill
 3255:   \ifpdf
 3256:     \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
 3257:   \else
 3258:     #2
 3259:   \fi
 3260:   \par
 3261: }}
 3262: 
 3263: % Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
 3264: % Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
 3265: % the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
 3266: \catcode`\@=11
 3267: 
 3268: \newbox\partialpage
 3269: \newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
 3270: 
 3271: \def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
 3272:   % Grab any single-column material above us.
 3273:   \output = {%
 3274:     %
 3275:     % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a
 3276:     % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output
 3277:     % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is
 3278:     % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off).  In
 3279:     % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal
 3280:     % output routine.  Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this
 3281:     % runs and this will be a no-op.  See the indexspread.tex test case.
 3282:     \ifvoid\partialpage \else
 3283:       \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}%
 3284:     \fi
 3285:     %
 3286:     \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{%
 3287:       % Unvbox the main output page.
 3288:       \unvbox\PAGE
 3289:       \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip
 3290:     }%
 3291:   }%
 3292:   \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage
 3293:   %
 3294:   % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
 3295:   \output = {\doublecolumnout}%
 3296:   %
 3297:   % Change the page size parameters.  We could do this once outside this
 3298:   % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
 3299:   % format, but then we repeat the same computation.  Repeating a couple
 3300:   % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
 3301:   % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.
 3302:   %
 3303:   % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
 3304:   % the columns.  We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
 3305:   % changes automatically with the paper format.  The magic constant
 3306:   % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)
 3307:   % as it did when we hard-coded it.
 3308:   %
 3309:   % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we
 3310:   % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
 3311:   % been clobbered.
 3312:   %
 3313:   \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize
 3314:     \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize
 3315:     \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2
 3316:   \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
 3317:   %
 3318:   % Double the \vsize as well.  (We don't need a separate register here,
 3319:   % since nobody clobbers \vsize.)
 3320:   \vsize = 2\vsize
 3321: }
 3322: 
 3323: % The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except
 3324: % the last.
 3325: %
 3326: \def\doublecolumnout{%
 3327:   \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
 3328:   % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
 3329:   % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
 3330:   % previous page.
 3331:   \dimen@ = \vsize
 3332:   \divide\dimen@ by 2
 3333:   \advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage
 3334:   %
 3335:   % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
 3336:   \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@
 3337:   \onepageout\pagesofar
 3338:   \unvbox255
 3339:   \penalty\outputpenalty
 3340: }
 3341: %
 3342: % Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
 3343: % followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.
 3344: \def\pagesofar{%
 3345:   \unvbox\partialpage
 3346:   %
 3347:   \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
 3348:   \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize
 3349:   \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
 3350: }
 3351: % 
 3352: % All done with double columns.
 3353: \def\enddoublecolumns{%
 3354:   \output = {%
 3355:     % Split the last of the double-column material.  Leave it on the
 3356:     % current page, no automatic page break.
 3357:     \balancecolumns
 3358:     %
 3359:     % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page,
 3360:     % though, there will be another page break right after this \output
 3361:     % invocation ends.  Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not
 3362:     % want to call it again.  Therefore, reset \output to its normal
 3363:     % definition right away.  (We hope \balancecolumns will never be
 3364:     % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes
 3365:     % the output somewhat more palatable.)
 3366:     \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}%
 3367:   }%
 3368:   \eject
 3369:   \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
 3370:   %
 3371:   % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted
 3372:   % the current page.  We're now back to normal single-column
 3373:   % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the
 3374:   % \endgroup where \vsize got restored).
 3375:   \pagegoal = \vsize
 3376: }
 3377: %
 3378: % Called at the end of the double column material.
 3379: \def\balancecolumns{%
 3380:   \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120.
 3381:   \dimen@ = \ht0
 3382:   \advance\dimen@ by \topskip
 3383:   \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
 3384:   \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to
 3385:   %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}%
 3386:   \splittopskip = \topskip
 3387:   % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint.
 3388:   {%
 3389:     \vbadness = 10000
 3390:     \loop
 3391:       \global\setbox3 = \copy0
 3392:       \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@
 3393:     \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@
 3394:       \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt
 3395:     \repeat
 3396:   }%
 3397:   %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}%
 3398:   \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}%
 3399:   \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}%
 3400:   %
 3401:   \pagesofar
 3402: }
 3403: \catcode`\@ = \other
 3404: 
 3405: 
 3406: \message{sectioning,}
 3407: % Chapters, sections, etc.
 3408: 
 3409: \newcount\chapno
 3410: \newcount\secno        \secno=0
 3411: \newcount\subsecno     \subsecno=0
 3412: \newcount\subsubsecno  \subsubsecno=0
 3413: 
 3414: % This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
 3415: \newcount\appendixno  \appendixno = `\@
 3416: % \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
 3417: % We do the following for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
 3418: % letter in the expansion, not just typeset.
 3419: \def\appendixletter{%
 3420:   \ifnum\appendixno=`A A%
 3421:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B%
 3422:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C%
 3423:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D%
 3424:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E%
 3425:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F%
 3426:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G%
 3427:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H%
 3428:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I%
 3429:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J%
 3430:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K%
 3431:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L%
 3432:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M%
 3433:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N%
 3434:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O%
 3435:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P%
 3436:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q%
 3437:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R%
 3438:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S%
 3439:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T%
 3440:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U%
 3441:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V%
 3442:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W%
 3443:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X%
 3444:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y%
 3445:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z%
 3446:   % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is
 3447:   % expanded while writing the .toc file.  \char\appendixno is not
 3448:   % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out
 3449:   % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it.
 3450:   \else\char\the\appendixno
 3451:   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
 3452:   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
 3453: 
 3454: % Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter.
 3455: % page headings and footings can use it.  @section does likewise.
 3456: \def\thischapter{}
 3457: \def\thissection{}
 3458: 
 3459: \newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
 3460: \newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raise/lowersections modify this count
 3461: 
 3462: % @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
 3463: \def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
 3464: \let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name
 3465: 
 3466: % @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.
 3467: \def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
 3468: \let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name
 3469: 
 3470: % Choose a numbered-heading macro
 3471: % #1 is heading level if unmodified by @raisesections or @lowersections
 3472: % #2 is text for heading
 3473: \def\numhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
 3474: \ifcase\absseclevel
 3475:   \chapterzzz{#2}
 3476: \or
 3477:   \seczzz{#2}
 3478: \or
 3479:   \numberedsubseczzz{#2}
 3480: \or
 3481:   \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
 3482: \else
 3483:   \ifnum \absseclevel<0
 3484:     \chapterzzz{#2}
 3485:   \else
 3486:     \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
 3487:   \fi
 3488: \fi
 3489: }
 3490: 
 3491: % like \numhead, but chooses appendix heading levels
 3492: \def\apphead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
 3493: \ifcase\absseclevel
 3494:   \appendixzzz{#2}
 3495: \or
 3496:   \appendixsectionzzz{#2}
 3497: \or
 3498:   \appendixsubseczzz{#2}
 3499: \or
 3500:   \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
 3501: \else
 3502:   \ifnum \absseclevel<0
 3503:     \appendixzzz{#2}
 3504:   \else
 3505:     \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
 3506:   \fi
 3507: \fi
 3508: }
 3509: 
 3510: % like \numhead, but chooses numberless heading levels
 3511: \def\unnmhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
 3512: \ifcase\absseclevel
 3513:   \unnumberedzzz{#2}
 3514: \or
 3515:   \unnumberedseczzz{#2}
 3516: \or
 3517:   \unnumberedsubseczzz{#2}
 3518: \or
 3519:   \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
 3520: \else
 3521:   \ifnum \absseclevel<0
 3522:     \unnumberedzzz{#2}
 3523:   \else
 3524:     \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
 3525:   \fi
 3526: \fi
 3527: }
 3528: 
 3529: % @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered.
 3530: \def\thischaptername{No Chapter Title}
 3531: \outer\def\chapter{\parsearg\chapteryyy}
 3532: \def\chapteryyy #1{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
 3533: \def\chapterzzz #1{%
 3534: \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
 3535: \global\advance \chapno by 1 \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}%
 3536: \chapmacro {#1}{\the\chapno}%
 3537: \gdef\thissection{#1}%
 3538: \gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
 3539: % We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter
 3540: % because we don't want its macros evaluated now.
 3541: \xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
 3542: \toks0 = {#1}%
 3543: \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash chapentry{\the\toks0}%
 3544:                                   {\the\chapno}}}%
 3545: \temp
 3546: \donoderef
 3547: \global\let\section = \numberedsec
 3548: \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
 3549: \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
 3550: }
 3551: 
 3552: \outer\def\appendix{\parsearg\appendixyyy}
 3553: \def\appendixyyy #1{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz
 3554: \def\appendixzzz #1{%
 3555: \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
 3556: \global\advance \appendixno by 1
 3557: \message{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}%
 3558: \chapmacro {#1}{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}%
 3559: \gdef\thissection{#1}%
 3560: \gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
 3561: \xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
 3562: \toks0 = {#1}%
 3563: \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash appendixentry{\the\toks0}%
 3564:                        {\appendixletter}}}%
 3565: \temp
 3566: \appendixnoderef
 3567: \global\let\section = \appendixsec
 3568: \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
 3569: \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
 3570: }
 3571: 
 3572: % @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
 3573: \outer\def\centerchap{\parsearg\centerchapyyy}
 3574: \def\centerchapyyy #1{{\let\unnumbchapmacro=\centerchapmacro \unnumberedyyy{#1}}}
 3575: 
 3576: % @top is like @unnumbered.
 3577: \outer\def\top{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
 3578: 
 3579: \outer\def\unnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
 3580: \def\unnumberedyyy #1{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz
 3581: \def\unnumberedzzz #1{%
 3582: \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
 3583: %
 3584: % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
 3585: % argument to \message.  Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
 3586: % expanded them.  For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
 3587: % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
 3588: % to be executed, not expanded).
 3589: %
 3590: % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
 3591: % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself.  We use
 3592: % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
 3593: % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>.  (We also do this for
 3594: % the toc entries.)
 3595: \toks0 = {#1}\message{(\the\toks0)}%
 3596: %
 3597: \unnumbchapmacro {#1}%
 3598: \gdef\thischapter{#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
 3599: \toks0 = {#1}%
 3600: \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbchapentry{\the\toks0}}}%
 3601: \temp
 3602: \unnumbnoderef
 3603: \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
 3604: \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
 3605: \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
 3606: }
 3607: 
 3608: % Sections.
 3609: \outer\def\numberedsec{\parsearg\secyyy}
 3610: \def\secyyy #1{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
 3611: \def\seczzz #1{%
 3612: \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
 3613: \gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}%
 3614: \toks0 = {#1}%
 3615: \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash secentry{\the\toks0}%
 3616:                                   {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}}}%
 3617: \temp
 3618: \donoderef
 3619: \nobreak
 3620: }
 3621: 
 3622: \outer\def\appendixsection{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
 3623: \outer\def\appendixsec{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
 3624: \def\appendixsecyyy #1{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz
 3625: \def\appendixsectionzzz #1{%
 3626: \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
 3627: \gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}%
 3628: \toks0 = {#1}%
 3629: \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash secentry{\the\toks0}%
 3630:                                   {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}}}%
 3631: \temp
 3632: \appendixnoderef
 3633: \nobreak
 3634: }
 3635: 
 3636: \outer\def\unnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsecyyy}
 3637: \def\unnumberedsecyyy #1{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz
 3638: \def\unnumberedseczzz #1{%
 3639: \plainsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
 3640: \toks0 = {#1}%
 3641: \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsecentry%
 3642:   {\the\toks0}{\the\chapno}}}%
 3643: \temp
 3644: \unnumbnoderef
 3645: \nobreak
 3646: }
 3647: 
 3648: % Subsections.
 3649: \outer\def\numberedsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsecyyy}
 3650: \def\numberedsubsecyyy #1{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz
 3651: \def\numberedsubseczzz #1{%
 3652: \gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
 3653: \subsecheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
 3654: \toks0 = {#1}%
 3655: \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsecentry{\the\toks0}%
 3656:                                     {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}}%
 3657: \temp
 3658: \donoderef
 3659: \nobreak
 3660: }
 3661: 
 3662: \outer\def\appendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsecyyy}
 3663: \def\appendixsubsecyyy #1{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz
 3664: \def\appendixsubseczzz #1{%
 3665: \gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
 3666: \subsecheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
 3667: \toks0 = {#1}%
 3668: \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsecentry{\the\toks0}%
 3669:                                 {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}}%
 3670: \temp
 3671: \appendixnoderef
 3672: \nobreak
 3673: }
 3674: 
 3675: \outer\def\unnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsecyyy}
 3676: \def\unnumberedsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz
 3677: \def\unnumberedsubseczzz #1{%
 3678: \plainsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
 3679: \toks0 = {#1}%
 3680: \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsubsecentry%
 3681:   {\the\toks0}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}}}%
 3682: \temp
 3683: \unnumbnoderef
 3684: \nobreak
 3685: }
 3686: 
 3687: % Subsubsections.
 3688: \outer\def\numberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsubsecyyy}
 3689: \def\numberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz
 3690: \def\numberedsubsubseczzz #1{%
 3691: \gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
 3692: \subsubsecheading {#1}
 3693:   {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
 3694: \toks0 = {#1}%
 3695: \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{\the\toks0}%
 3696:   {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}}%
 3697: \temp
 3698: \donoderef
 3699: \nobreak
 3700: }
 3701: 
 3702: \outer\def\appendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubsecyyy}
 3703: \def\appendixsubsubsecyyy #1{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz
 3704: \def\appendixsubsubseczzz #1{%
 3705: \gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
 3706: \subsubsecheading {#1}
 3707:   {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
 3708: \toks0 = {#1}%
 3709: \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{\the\toks0}%
 3710:   {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}}%
 3711: \temp
 3712: \appendixnoderef
 3713: \nobreak
 3714: }
 3715: 
 3716: \outer\def\unnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy}
 3717: \def\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz
 3718: \def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz #1{%
 3719: \plainsubsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
 3720: \toks0 = {#1}%
 3721: \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsubsubsecentry%
 3722:   {\the\toks0}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}}%
 3723: \temp
 3724: \unnumbnoderef
 3725: \nobreak
 3726: }
 3727: 
 3728: % These are variants which are not "outer", so they can appear in @ifinfo.
 3729: % Actually, they should now be obsolete; ordinary section commands should work.
 3730: \def\infotop{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
 3731: \def\infounnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
 3732: \def\infounnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedseczzz}
 3733: \def\infounnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubseczzz}
 3734: \def\infounnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubseczzz}
 3735: 
 3736: \def\infoappendix{\parsearg\appendixzzz}
 3737: \def\infoappendixsec{\parsearg\appendixseczzz}
 3738: \def\infoappendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubseczzz}
 3739: \def\infoappendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubseczzz}
 3740: 
 3741: \def\infochapter{\parsearg\chapterzzz}
 3742: \def\infosection{\parsearg\sectionzzz}
 3743: \def\infosubsection{\parsearg\subsectionzzz}
 3744: \def\infosubsubsection{\parsearg\subsubsectionzzz}
 3745: 
 3746: % These macros control what the section commands do, according
 3747: % to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
 3748: % Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
 3749: \global\let\section = \numberedsec
 3750: \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
 3751: \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
 3752: 
 3753: % Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
 3754: 
 3755: % NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such:
 3756: %       1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit
 3757: %          overlong headings to fold.
 3758: %       2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a
 3759: %          heading is obnoxious; this forbids it.
 3760: %       3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and
 3761: %          if justification is not attempted.  Hence \raggedright.
 3762: 
 3763: 
 3764: \def\majorheading{\parsearg\majorheadingzzz}
 3765: \def\majorheadingzzz #1{%
 3766: {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
 3767: {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
 3768:                   \parindent=0pt\raggedright
 3769:                   \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200}
 3770: 
 3771: \def\chapheading{\parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
 3772: \def\chapheadingzzz #1{\chapbreak %
 3773: {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
 3774:                   \parindent=0pt\raggedright
 3775:                   \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200}
 3776: 
 3777: % @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
 3778: \def\heading{\parsearg\plainsecheading}
 3779: \def\subheading{\parsearg\plainsubsecheading}
 3780: \def\subsubheading{\parsearg\plainsubsubsecheading}
 3781: 
 3782: % These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
 3783: % (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
 3784: % given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
 3785: 
 3786: %%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
 3787: \def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
 3788: 
 3789: \def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
 3790: 
 3791: %%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it
 3792: % Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
 3793: 
 3794: \newskip\chapheadingskip
 3795: 
 3796: \def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
 3797: \def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
 3798: \def\chapoddpage{\chappager \ifodd\pageno \else \hbox to 0pt{} \chappager\fi}
 3799: 
 3800: \def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname}
 3801: 
 3802: \def\CHAPPAGoff{%
 3803: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
 3804: \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak
 3805: \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager}
 3806: 
 3807: \def\CHAPPAGon{%
 3808: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
 3809: \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager
 3810: \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager
 3811: \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
 3812: 
 3813: \def\CHAPPAGodd{
 3814: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
 3815: \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
 3816: \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage
 3817: \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}}
 3818: 
 3819: \CHAPPAGon
 3820: 
 3821: \def\CHAPFplain{
 3822: \global\let\chapmacro=\chfplain
 3823: \global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfplain
 3824: \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfplain}
 3825: 
 3826: % Plain chapter opening.
 3827: % #1 is the text, #2 the chapter number or empty if unnumbered.
 3828: \def\chfplain#1#2{%
 3829:   \pchapsepmacro
 3830:   {%
 3831:     \chapfonts \rm
 3832:     \def\chapnum{#2}%
 3833:     \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\chapnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}%
 3834:     \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
 3835:           \hangindent = \wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
 3836:           \unhbox0 #1\par}%
 3837:   }%
 3838:   \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
 3839:   \nobreak
 3840: }
 3841: 
 3842: % Plain opening for unnumbered.
 3843: \def\unnchfplain#1{\chfplain{#1}{}}
 3844: 
 3845: % @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
 3846: \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
 3847: \def\centerchfplain#1{{%
 3848:   \def\centerparametersmaybe{%
 3849:     \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
 3850:     \leftskip = \rightskip
 3851:     \parfillskip = 0pt
 3852:   }%
 3853:   \chfplain{#1}{}%
 3854: }}
 3855: 
 3856: \CHAPFplain % The default
 3857: 
 3858: \def\unnchfopen #1{%
 3859: \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
 3860:                        \parindent=0pt\raggedright
 3861:                        \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
 3862: }
 3863: 
 3864: \def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
 3865: \vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
 3866: \par\penalty 5000 %
 3867: }
 3868: 
 3869: \def\centerchfopen #1{%
 3870: \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
 3871:                        \parindent=0pt
 3872:                        \hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
 3873: }
 3874: 
 3875: \def\CHAPFopen{
 3876: \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
 3877: \global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfopen
 3878: \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
 3879: 
 3880: 
 3881: % Section titles.
 3882: \newskip\secheadingskip
 3883: \def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip {-1000}}
 3884: \def\secheading#1#2#3{\sectionheading{sec}{#2.#3}{#1}}
 3885: \def\plainsecheading#1{\sectionheading{sec}{}{#1}}
 3886: 
 3887: % Subsection titles.
 3888: \newskip \subsecheadingskip
 3889: \def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip {-500}}
 3890: \def\subsecheading#1#2#3#4{\sectionheading{subsec}{#2.#3.#4}{#1}}
 3891: \def\plainsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsec}{}{#1}}
 3892: 
 3893: % Subsubsection titles.
 3894: \let\subsubsecheadingskip = \subsecheadingskip
 3895: \let\subsubsecheadingbreak = \subsecheadingbreak
 3896: \def\subsubsecheading#1#2#3#4#5{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{#2.#3.#4.#5}{#1}}
 3897: \def\plainsubsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{}{#1}}
 3898: 
 3899: 
 3900: % Print any size section title.
 3901: %
 3902: % #1 is the section type (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #2 is the section
 3903: % number (maybe empty), #3 the text.
 3904: \def\sectionheading#1#2#3{%
 3905:   {%
 3906:     \expandafter\advance\csname #1headingskip\endcsname by \parskip
 3907:     \csname #1headingbreak\endcsname
 3908:   }%
 3909:   {%
 3910:     % Switch to the right set of fonts.
 3911:     \csname #1fonts\endcsname \rm
 3912:     %
 3913:     % Only insert the separating space if we have a section number.
 3914:     \def\secnum{#2}%
 3915:     \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\secnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}%
 3916:     %
 3917:     \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
 3918:           \hangindent = \wd0 % zero if no section number
 3919:           \unhbox0 #3}%
 3920:   }%
 3921:   \ifdim\parskip<10pt \nobreak\kern10pt\nobreak\kern-\parskip\fi \nobreak
 3922: }
 3923: 
 3924: 
 3925: \message{toc,}
 3926: % Table of contents.
 3927: \newwrite\tocfile
 3928: 
 3929: % Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
 3930: % Called from @chapter, etc.  We supply {\folio} at the end of the
 3931: % argument, which will end up as the last argument to the \...entry macro.
 3932: %
 3933: % We open the .toc file here instead of at @setfilename or any other
 3934: % fixed time so that @contents can be put in the document anywhere.
 3935: %
 3936: \newif\iftocfileopened
 3937: \def\writetocentry#1{%
 3938:   \iftocfileopened\else
 3939:     \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
 3940:     \global\tocfileopenedtrue
 3941:   \fi
 3942:   \iflinks \write\tocfile{#1{\folio}}\fi
 3943:   %
 3944:   % Tell \shipout to create a page destination if we're doing pdf, which
 3945:   % will be the target of the links in the table of contents.  We can't
 3946:   % just do it on every page because the title pages are numbered 1 and
 3947:   % 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first two pages
 3948:   % of the document.  Thus, we'd have two destinations named `1', and
 3949:   % two named `2'.
 3950:   \ifpdf \pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi
 3951: }
 3952: 
 3953: \newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
 3954: \newcount\savepageno
 3955: \newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
 3956: 
 3957: % Finish up the main text and prepare to read what we've written
 3958: % to \tocfile.
 3959: %
 3960: \def\startcontents#1{%
 3961:    % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
 3962:    % start on an odd page, unlike chapters.  Thus, we maintain
 3963:    % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
 3964:    % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
 3965:    \contentsalignmacro
 3966:    \immediate\closeout\tocfile
 3967:    %
 3968:    % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
 3969:    % It is abundantly clear what they are.
 3970:    \unnumbchapmacro{#1}\def\thischapter{}%
 3971:    \savepageno = \pageno
 3972:    \begingroup                  % Set up to handle contents files properly.
 3973:       \catcode`\\=0  \catcode`\{=1  \catcode`\}=2  \catcode`\@=11
 3974:       % We can't do this, because then an actual ^ in a section
 3975:       % title fails, e.g., @chapter ^ -- exponentiation.  --karl, 9jul97.
 3976:       %\catcode`\^=7 % to see ^^e4 as \"a etc. juha@piuha.ydi.vtt.fi
 3977:       \raggedbottom             % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
 3978:       \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
 3979:       %
 3980:       % Roman numerals for page numbers.
 3981:       \ifnum \pageno>0 \pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
 3982: }
 3983: 
 3984: 
 3985: % Normal (long) toc.
 3986: \def\contents{%
 3987:    \startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
 3988:      \openin 1 \jobname.toc
 3989:      \ifeof 1 \else
 3990:        \closein 1
 3991:        \input \jobname.toc
 3992:      \fi
 3993:      \vfill \eject
 3994:      \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
 3995:      \pdfmakeoutlines
 3996:    \endgroup
 3997:    \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
 3998:    \pageno = \savepageno
 3999: }
 4000: 
 4001: % And just the chapters.
 4002: \def\summarycontents{%
 4003:    \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
 4004:       %
 4005:       \let\chapentry = \shortchapentry
 4006:       \let\appendixentry = \shortappendixentry
 4007:       \let\unnumbchapentry = \shortunnumberedentry
 4008:       % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
 4009:       \secfonts
 4010:       \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf \let\sl=\shortcontsl
 4011:       \rm
 4012:       \hyphenpenalty = 10000
 4013:       \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
 4014:       \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{}
 4015:       \def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2##3{}
 4016:       \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{}
 4017:       \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4{}
 4018:       \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{}
 4019:       \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{}
 4020:       \openin 1 \jobname.toc
 4021:       \ifeof 1 \else
 4022:         \closein 1
 4023:         \input \jobname.toc
 4024:       \fi
 4025:      \vfill \eject
 4026:      \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
 4027:    \endgroup
 4028:    \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
 4029:    \pageno = \savepageno
 4030: }
 4031: \let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
 4032: 
 4033: \ifpdf
 4034:   \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}%
 4035: \fi
 4036: 
 4037: % These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
 4038: % The first argument is the chapter or section name.
 4039: % The last argument is the page number.
 4040: % The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
 4041: 
 4042: % Chapters, in the main contents.
 4043: \def\chapentry#1#2#3{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#3}}
 4044: %
 4045: % Chapters, in the short toc.
 4046: % See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings.
 4047: \def\shortchapentry#1#2#3{%
 4048:   \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#3\egroup}%
 4049: }
 4050: 
 4051: % Appendices, in the main contents.
 4052: \def\appendixentry#1#2#3{\dochapentry{\putwordAppendix{} #2\labelspace#1}{#3}}
 4053: %
 4054: % Appendices, in the short toc.
 4055: \let\shortappendixentry = \shortchapentry
 4056: 
 4057: % Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
 4058: % The arg is, e.g., `Appendix A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
 4059: % We could simplify the code here by writing out an \appendixentry
 4060: % command in the toc file for appendices, instead of using \chapentry
 4061: % for both, but it doesn't seem worth it.
 4062: %
 4063: \newdimen\shortappendixwidth
 4064: %
 4065: \def\shortchaplabel#1{%
 4066:   % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the
 4067:   % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
 4068:   % But use \hss just in case.
 4069:   % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
 4070:   % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
 4071:   \dimen0 = 1em
 4072:   \hbox to \dimen0{#1\hss}%
 4073: }
 4074: 
 4075: % Unnumbered chapters.
 4076: \def\unnumbchapentry#1#2{\dochapentry{#1}{#2}}
 4077: \def\shortunnumberedentry#1#2{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#2\egroup}}
 4078: 
 4079: % Sections.
 4080: \def\secentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2.#3\labelspace#1}{#4}}
 4081: \def\unnumbsecentry#1#2#3{\dosecentry{#1}{#3}}
 4082: 
 4083: % Subsections.
 4084: \def\subsecentry#1#2#3#4#5{\dosubsecentry{#2.#3.#4\labelspace#1}{#5}}
 4085: \def\unnumbsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
 4086: 
 4087: % And subsubsections.
 4088: \def\subsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
 4089:   \dosubsubsecentry{#2.#3.#4.#5\labelspace#1}{#6}}
 4090: \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#5}}
 4091: 
 4092: % This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
 4093: \newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 3pc
 4094: 
 4095: % Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
 4096: % page number.
 4097: %
 4098: % If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters
 4099: % if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
 4100: \def\dochapentry#1#2{%
 4101:    \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip
 4102:    \begingroup
 4103:      \chapentryfonts
 4104:      \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
 4105:    \endgroup
 4106:    \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip
 4107: }
 4108: 
 4109: \def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup
 4110:   \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent
 4111:   \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
 4112: \endgroup}
 4113: 
 4114: \def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
 4115:   \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent
 4116:   \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
 4117: \endgroup}
 4118: 
 4119: \def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
 4120:   \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent
 4121:   \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
 4122: \endgroup}
 4123: 
 4124: % Final typesetting of a toc entry; we use the same \entry macro as for
 4125: % the index entries, but we want to suppress hyphenation here.  (We
 4126: % can't do that in the \entry macro, since index entries might consist
 4127: % of hyphenated-identifiers-that-do-not-fit-on-a-line-and-nothing-else.)
 4128: \def\tocentry#1#2{\begingroup
 4129:   \vskip 0pt plus1pt % allow a little stretch for the sake of nice page breaks
 4130:   % Do not use \turnoffactive in these arguments.  Since the toc is
 4131:   % typeset in cmr, characters such as _ would come out wrong; we
 4132:   % have to do the usual translation tricks.
 4133:   \entry{#1}{#2}%
 4134: \endgroup}
 4135: 
 4136: % Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
 4137: \def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
 4138: 
 4139: \def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}}
 4140: \def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}}
 4141: 
 4142: \def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
 4143: \def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
 4144: \let\subsecentryfonts = \textfonts
 4145: \let\subsubsecentryfonts = \textfonts
 4146: 
 4147: 
 4148: \message{environments,}
 4149: % @foo ... @end foo.
 4150: 
 4151: % @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
 4152: % 
 4153: % Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of
 4154: % \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
 4155: %
 4156: \def\point{$\star$}
 4157: \def\result{\leavevmode\raise.15ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
 4158: \def\expansion{\leavevmode\raise.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
 4159: \def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
 4160: \def\equiv{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
 4161: 
 4162: % The @error{} command.
 4163: % Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
 4164: % 
 4165: \newbox\errorbox
 4166: %
 4167: {\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
 4168: \dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
 4169: % The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
 4170: \setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \tensf error\kern-1.5pt}
 4171: %
 4172: \global\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
 4173:    \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
 4174:    \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
 4175:    \vbox{
 4176:       \hrule height\dimen2
 4177:       \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt          % Space to left of text.
 4178:          \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
 4179:          \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
 4180:       \hrule height\dimen2}
 4181:     \hfil}
 4182: %
 4183: \def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
 4184: 
 4185: % @tex ... @end tex    escapes into raw Tex temporarily.
 4186: % One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
 4187: % But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character.
 4188: 
 4189: \def\tex{\begingroup
 4190:   \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
 4191:   \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
 4192:   \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=13 \let~=\tie
 4193:   \catcode `\%=14
 4194:   \catcode 43=12 % plus
 4195:   \catcode`\"=12
 4196:   \catcode`\==12
 4197:   \catcode`\|=12
 4198:   \catcode`\<=12
 4199:   \catcode`\>=12
 4200:   \escapechar=`\\
 4201:   %
 4202:   \let\b=\ptexb
 4203:   \let\bullet=\ptexbullet
 4204:   \let\c=\ptexc
 4205:   \let\,=\ptexcomma
 4206:   \let\.=\ptexdot
 4207:   \let\dots=\ptexdots
 4208:   \let\equiv=\ptexequiv
 4209:   \let\!=\ptexexclam
 4210:   \let\i=\ptexi
 4211:   \let\{=\ptexlbrace
 4212:   \let\+=\tabalign
 4213:   \let\}=\ptexrbrace
 4214:   \let\*=\ptexstar
 4215:   \let\t=\ptext
 4216:   %
 4217:   \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
 4218:   \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
 4219:   \def\@{@}%
 4220: \let\Etex=\endgroup}
 4221: 
 4222: % Define @lisp ... @end lisp.
 4223: % @lisp does a \begingroup so it can rebind things,
 4224: % including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous).
 4225: 
 4226: % Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
 4227: \newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in
 4228: 
 4229: % This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other
 4230: % such environments.  \null is better than a space, since it doesn't
 4231: % have any width.
 4232: \def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
 4233: 
 4234: % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
 4235: % space in the output.  Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
 4236: % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
 4237: % should produce a line of output anyway.
 4238: %
 4239: {\obeyspaces %
 4240: \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}}
 4241: 
 4242: % Define \obeyedspace to be our active space, whatever it is.  This is
 4243: % for use in \parsearg.
 4244: {\sepspaces%
 4245: \global\let\obeyedspace= }
 4246: 
 4247: % This space is always present above and below environments.
 4248: \newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
 4249: 
 4250: % Make spacing and below environment symmetrical.  We use \parskip here
 4251: % to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
 4252: % is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
 4253: % start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip
 4254: %
 4255: \def\aboveenvbreak{{%
 4256:   \ifnum\lastpenalty < 10000
 4257:     \advance\envskipamount by \parskip
 4258:     \endgraf
 4259:     \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
 4260:       \removelastskip
 4261:       \penalty-50
 4262:       \vskip\envskipamount
 4263:     \fi
 4264:   \fi
 4265: }}
 4266: 
 4267: \let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak
 4268: 
 4269: % \nonarrowing is a flag.  If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins.
 4270: \let\nonarrowing=\relax
 4271: 
 4272: % @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around
 4273: % environment contents.
 4274: \font\circle=lcircle10
 4275: \newdimen\circthick
 4276: \newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner
 4277: \newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip
 4278: \circthick=\fontdimen8\circle
 4279: %
 4280: \def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth
 4281: \def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}}
 4282: \def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}}
 4283: \def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}}
 4284: \def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
 4285:         \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr
 4286:         \hskip\rskip}}
 4287: \def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
 4288:         \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr
 4289:         \hskip\rskip}}
 4290: %
 4291: \newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
 4292: 
 4293: \long\def\cartouche{%
 4294: \begingroup
 4295:         \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
 4296:         \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt %we want these *outside*.
 4297:         \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
 4298:                           \advance\cartinner by-\rskip
 4299:         \cartouter=\hsize
 4300:         \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either
 4301: %                                    side, and for 6pt waste from
 4302: %                                    each corner char, and rule thickness
 4303:         \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
 4304:         % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
 4305:         \let\nonarrowing=\comment
 4306:         \vbox\bgroup
 4307:                 \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
 4308:                 \carttop
 4309:                 \hbox\bgroup
 4310:                         \hskip\lskip
 4311:                         \vrule\kern3pt
 4312:                         \vbox\bgroup
 4313:                                 \hsize=\cartinner
 4314:                                 \kern3pt
 4315:                                 \begingroup
 4316:                                         \baselineskip=\normbskip
 4317:                                         \lineskip=\normlskip
 4318:                                         \parskip=\normpskip
 4319:                                         \vskip -\parskip
 4320: \def\Ecartouche{%
 4321:                                 \endgroup
 4322:                                 \kern3pt
 4323:                         \egroup
 4324:                         \kern3pt\vrule
 4325:                         \hskip\rskip
 4326:                 \egroup
 4327:                 \cartbot
 4328:         \egroup
 4329: \endgroup
 4330: }}
 4331: 
 4332: 
 4333: % This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
 4334: % inside a group.
 4335: \def\nonfillstart{%
 4336:   \aboveenvbreak
 4337:   \inENV % This group ends at the end of the body
 4338:   \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy
 4339:   \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
 4340:   \singlespace
 4341:   \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
 4342:   \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
 4343:   \parskip = 0pt
 4344:   \parindent = 0pt
 4345:   \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
 4346:   % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing
 4347:   % at next level down.
 4348:   \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
 4349:     \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
 4350:     \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
 4351:     \let\exdent=\nofillexdent
 4352:     \let\nonarrowing=\relax
 4353:   \fi
 4354: }
 4355: 
 4356: % Define the \E... control sequence only if we are inside the particular
 4357: % environment, so the error checking in \end will work.
 4358: %
 4359: % To end an @example-like environment, we first end the paragraph (via
 4360: % \afterenvbreak's vertical glue), and then the group.  That way we keep
 4361: % the zero \parskip that the environments set -- \parskip glue will be
 4362: % inserted at the beginning of the next paragraph in the document, after
 4363: % the environment.
 4364: %
 4365: \def\nonfillfinish{\afterenvbreak\endgroup}
 4366: 
 4367: % @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font.
 4368: \def\lisp{\begingroup
 4369:   \nonfillstart
 4370:   \let\Elisp = \nonfillfinish
 4371:   \tt
 4372:   \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
 4373:   \gobble       % eat return
 4374: }
 4375: 
 4376: % @example: Same as @lisp.
 4377: \def\example{\begingroup \def\Eexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
 4378: 
 4379: % @small... is usually equivalent to the non-small (@smallbook
 4380: % redefines).  We must call \example (or whatever) last in the
 4381: % definition, since it reads the return following the @example (or
 4382: % whatever) command.
 4383: %
 4384: % This actually allows (for example) @end display inside an
 4385: % @smalldisplay.  Too bad, but makeinfo will catch the error anyway.
 4386: %
 4387: \def\smalldisplay{\begingroup\def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\display}
 4388: \def\smallexample{\begingroup\def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
 4389: \def\smallformat{\begingroup\def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\format}
 4390: \def\smalllisp{\begingroup\def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
 4391: 
 4392: % Real @smallexample and @smalllisp (when @smallbook): use smaller fonts.
 4393: % Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
 4394: \def\smalllispx{\begingroup
 4395:   \def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
 4396:   \def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
 4397:   \smallexamplefonts
 4398:   \lisp
 4399: }
 4400: 
 4401: % @display: same as @lisp except keep current font.
 4402: %
 4403: \def\display{\begingroup
 4404:   \nonfillstart
 4405:   \let\Edisplay = \nonfillfinish
 4406:   \gobble
 4407: }
 4408: %
 4409: % @smalldisplay (when @smallbook): @display plus smaller fonts.
 4410: %
 4411: \def\smalldisplayx{\begingroup
 4412:   \def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
 4413:   \smallexamplefonts \rm
 4414:   \display
 4415: }
 4416: 
 4417: % @format: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
 4418: %
 4419: \def\format{\begingroup
 4420:   \let\nonarrowing = t
 4421:   \nonfillstart
 4422:   \let\Eformat = \nonfillfinish
 4423:   \gobble
 4424: }
 4425: %
 4426: % @smallformat (when @smallbook): @format plus smaller fonts.
 4427: %
 4428: \def\smallformatx{\begingroup
 4429:   \def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
 4430:   \smallexamplefonts \rm
 4431:   \format
 4432: }
 4433: 
 4434: % @flushleft (same as @format).
 4435: %
 4436: \def\flushleft{\begingroup \def\Eflushleft{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\format}
 4437: 
 4438: % @flushright.
 4439: %
 4440: \def\flushright{\begingroup
 4441:   \let\nonarrowing = t
 4442:   \nonfillstart
 4443:   \let\Eflushright = \nonfillfinish
 4444:   \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill
 4445:   \gobble
 4446: }
 4447: 
 4448: 
 4449: % @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
 4450: % and narrows the margins.
 4451: %
 4452: \def\quotation{%
 4453:   \begingroup\inENV %This group ends at the end of the @quotation body
 4454:   {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
 4455:   \singlespace
 4456:   \parindent=0pt
 4457:   % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
 4458:   % doing normal filling. So to avoid extra space below the environment...
 4459:   \def\Equotation{\parskip = 0pt \nonfillfinish}%
 4460:   %
 4461:   % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
 4462:   \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
 4463:     \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
 4464:     \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
 4465:     \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
 4466:     \let\nonarrowing = \relax
 4467:   \fi
 4468: }
 4469: 
 4470: 
 4471: % LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>}
 4472: % If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter, 
 4473: % we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg:
 4474: % `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command.  --janneke@gnu.org
 4475: %
 4476: % [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996.  The TeXbook.
 4477: %
 4478: % [Knuth] p. 344; only we need to do '@' too
 4479: \def\dospecials{%
 4480:   \do\ \do\\\do\@\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&%
 4481:   \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~}
 4482: %
 4483: % [Knuth] p. 380
 4484: \def\uncatcodespecials{%
 4485:   \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=12}\dospecials}
 4486: %
 4487: % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391
 4488: % Disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font
 4489: \begingroup
 4490:   \catcode`\`=\active\gdef`{\relax\lq}
 4491: \endgroup
 4492: %
 4493: % Setup for the @verb command.
 4494: %
 4495: % Eight spaces for a tab
 4496: \begingroup
 4497:   \catcode`\^^I=\active
 4498:   \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }}
 4499: \endgroup
 4500: %
 4501: \def\setupverb{%
 4502:   \tt  % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
 4503:   \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}%
 4504:   \catcode`\`=\active
 4505:   \tabeightspaces
 4506:   % Respect line breaks,
 4507:   % print special symbols as themselves, and
 4508:   % make each space count
 4509:   % must do in this order:
 4510:   \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
 4511: }
 4512: 
 4513: % Setup for the @verbatim environment
 4514: %
 4515: % Real tab expansion
 4516: \newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount
 4517: %
 4518: \def\starttabbox{\setbox0=\hbox\bgroup}
 4519: \begingroup
 4520:   \catcode`\^^I=\active
 4521:   \gdef\tabexpand{%
 4522:     \catcode`\^^I=\active
 4523:     \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup
 4524:       \dimen0=\wd0 % the width so far, or since the previous tab
 4525:       \divide\dimen0 by\tabw
 4526:       \multiply\dimen0 by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw
 4527:       \advance\dimen0 by\tabw  % advance to next multiple of \tabw
 4528:       \wd0=\dimen0 \box0 \starttabbox
 4529:     }%
 4530:   }
 4531: \endgroup
 4532: \def\setupverbatim{%
 4533:   % Easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
 4534:   \tt
 4535:   \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box0\endgraf}%
 4536:   \catcode`\`=\active
 4537:   \tabexpand
 4538:   % Respect line breaks,
 4539:   % print special symbols as themselves, and
 4540:   % make each space count
 4541:   % must do in this order:
 4542:   \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
 4543:   \everypar{\starttabbox}%
 4544: }
 4545: 
 4546: % Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique 
 4547: % delimiter characters.  Before first delimiter expect a 
 4548: % right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace:
 4549: %
 4550: %    \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1}
 4551: %
 4552: % [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {}
 4553: \begingroup
 4554:   \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=12\catcode`\}=12
 4555:   \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next]
 4556: \endgroup
 4557: %
 4558: \def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb}
 4559: %
 4560: %
 4561: % Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that
 4562: % the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie:
 4563: %
 4564: %     \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1}
 4565: %
 4566: % For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX, 
 4567: % because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}':
 4568: % we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'
 4569: %
 4570: % Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx]
 4571: %% Include LaTeX hack for completeness -- never know
 4572: %% \begingroup
 4573: %% \catcode`|=0 \catcode`[=1
 4574: %% \catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=12\catcode`\}=12\catcode`\ =\active
 4575: %% \catcode`\\=12|gdef|doverbatim#1@end verbatim[
 4576: %% #1|endgroup|def|Everbatim[]|end[verbatim]]
 4577: %% |endgroup
 4578: \begingroup
 4579:   \catcode`\ =\active
 4580:   \gdef\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1\end{verbatim}}
 4581: \endgroup
 4582: %
 4583: \def\verbatim{%
 4584:   \def\Everbatim{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
 4585:   \begingroup
 4586:     \nonfillstart
 4587:     \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
 4588:     \begingroup\setupverbatim\doverbatim
 4589: }
 4590: 
 4591: % @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment.
 4592: %
 4593: % Allow normal characters that we make active in the argument (a file name).
 4594: \def\verbatiminclude{%
 4595:   \begingroup
 4596:     \catcode`\\=12
 4597:     \catcode`~=12
 4598:     \catcode`^=12
 4599:     \catcode`_=12
 4600:     \catcode`|=12
 4601:     \catcode`<=12
 4602:     \catcode`>=12
 4603:     \catcode`+=12
 4604:     \parsearg\doverbatiminclude
 4605: }
 4606: \def\setupverbatiminclude{%
 4607:   \begingroup
 4608:     \nonfillstart
 4609:     \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
 4610:     \begingroup\setupverbatim
 4611: }
 4612: %
 4613: \def\doverbatiminclude#1{%
 4614:      % Restore active chars for included file.
 4615:   \endgroup
 4616:   \begingroup
 4617:   \def\thisfile{#1}%
 4618:   \expandafter\expandafter\setupverbatiminclude\input\thisfile
 4619:   \endgroup\nonfillfinish\endgroup
 4620: }
 4621: 
 4622: % @copying ... @end copying.
 4623: % Save the text away for @insertcopying later.
 4624: % 
 4625: \newbox\copyingbox
 4626: %
 4627: \def\copying{\begingroup
 4628:   \parindent = 0pt  % looks wrong on title page
 4629:   \def\Ecopying{\egroup\endgroup}%
 4630:   \global\setbox\copyingbox = \vbox\bgroup
 4631: }
 4632: 
 4633: % @insertcopying.
 4634: % 
 4635: \def\insertcopying{\unvcopy\copyingbox}
 4636: 
 4637: 
 4638: \message{defuns,}
 4639: % @defun etc.
 4640: 
 4641: % Allow user to change definition object font (\df) internally
 4642: \def\setdeffont #1 {\csname DEF#1\endcsname}
 4643: 
 4644: \newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
 4645: \newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
 4646: \newskip\deftypemargin \deftypemargin=12pt
 4647: \newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
 4648: 
 4649: \newcount\parencount
 4650: % define \functionparens, which makes ( and ) and & do special things.
 4651: % \functionparens affects the group it is contained in.
 4652: \def\activeparens{%
 4653: \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active \catcode`\&=\active
 4654: \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active}
 4655: 
 4656: % Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
 4657: \let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
 4658: 
 4659: {\activeparens % Now, smart parens don't turn on until &foo (see \amprm)
 4660: 
 4661: % Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc.  For example,
 4662: % if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
 4663: % so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
 4664: \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
 4665: \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
 4666: 
 4667: \gdef\functionparens{\boldbrax\let&=\amprm\parencount=0 }
 4668: \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
 4669: % This is used to turn on special parens
 4670: % but make & act ordinary (given that it's active).
 4671: \gdef\boldbraxnoamp{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb\let&=\ampnr}
 4672: 
 4673: % Definitions of (, ) and & used in args for functions.
 4674: % This is the definition of ( outside of all parentheses.
 4675: \gdef\oprm#1 {{\rm\char`\(}#1 \bf \let(=\opnested
 4676:   \global\advance\parencount by 1
 4677: }
 4678: %
 4679: % This is the definition of ( when already inside a level of parens.
 4680: \gdef\opnested{\char`\(\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
 4681: %
 4682: \gdef\clrm{% Print a paren in roman if it is taking us back to depth of 0.
 4683:   % also in that case restore the outer-level definition of (.
 4684:   \ifnum \parencount=1 {\rm \char `\)}\sl \let(=\oprm \else \char `\) \fi
 4685:   \global\advance \parencount by -1 }
 4686: % If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
 4687: \gdef\amprm#1 {{\rm\&#1}\let(=\oprm \let)=\clrm\ }
 4688: %
 4689: \gdef\normalparens{\boldbrax\let&=\ampnr}
 4690: } % End of definition inside \activeparens
 4691: %% These parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than the
 4692: %% contained text.  This is especially needed for [ and ]
 4693: \def\opnr{{\sf\char`\(}\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
 4694: \def\clnr{{\sf\char`\)}\global\advance\parencount by -1 }
 4695: \let\ampnr = \&
 4696: \def\lbrb{{\bf\char`\[}}
 4697: \def\rbrb{{\bf\char`\]}}
 4698: 
 4699: % Active &'s sneak into the index arguments, so make sure it's defined.
 4700: {
 4701:   \catcode`& = 13
 4702:   \global\let& = \ampnr
 4703: }
 4704: 
 4705: % First, defname, which formats the header line itself.
 4706: % #1 should be the function name.
 4707: % #2 should be the type of definition, such as "Function".
 4708: 
 4709: \def\defname #1#2{%
 4710: % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were
 4711: % outside the @def...
 4712: \dimen2=\leftskip
 4713: \advance\dimen2 by -\defbodyindent
 4714: \noindent
 4715: \setbox0=\hbox{\hskip \deflastargmargin{\rm #2}\hskip \deftypemargin}%
 4716: \dimen0=\hsize \advance \dimen0 by -\wd0 % compute size for first line
 4717: \dimen1=\hsize \advance \dimen1 by -\defargsindent %size for continuations
 4718: \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen1
 4719: % Now output arg 2 ("Function" or some such)
 4720: % ending at \deftypemargin from the right margin,
 4721: % but stuck inside a box of width 0 so it does not interfere with linebreaking
 4722: {% Adjust \hsize to exclude the ambient margins,
 4723: % so that \rightline will obey them.
 4724: \advance \hsize by -\dimen2
 4725: \rlap{\rightline{{\rm #2}\hskip -1.25pc }}}%
 4726: % Make all lines underfull and no complaints:
 4727: \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
 4728: \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
 4729: \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
 4730: {\df #1}\enskip        % Generate function name
 4731: }
 4732: 
 4733: % Actually process the body of a definition
 4734: % #1 should be the terminating control sequence, such as \Edefun.
 4735: % #2 should be the "another name" control sequence, such as \defunx.
 4736: % #3 should be the control sequence that actually processes the header,
 4737: %    such as \defunheader.
 4738: 
 4739: \def\defparsebody #1#2#3{\begingroup\inENV% Environment for definitionbody
 4740: \medbreak %
 4741: % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
 4742: % so that it will exit this group.
 4743: \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
 4744: \def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3}%
 4745: \parindent=0in
 4746: \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
 4747: \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
 4748: \begingroup %
 4749: \catcode 61=\active % 61 is `='
 4750: \obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3}
 4751: 
 4752: % #1 is the \E... control sequence to end the definition (which we define).
 4753: % #2 is the \...x control sequence for consecutive fns (which we define).
 4754: % #3 is the control sequence to call to resume processing.
 4755: % #4, delimited by the space, is the class name.
 4756: %
 4757: \def\defmethparsebody#1#2#3#4 {\begingroup\inENV %
 4758: \medbreak %
 4759: % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
 4760: % so that it will exit this group.
 4761: \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
 4762: \def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
 4763: \parindent=0in
 4764: \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
 4765: \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
 4766: \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#4}}}
 4767: 
 4768: % Used for @deftypemethod and @deftypeivar.
 4769: % #1 is the \E... control sequence to end the definition (which we define).
 4770: % #2 is the \...x control sequence for consecutive fns (which we define).
 4771: % #3 is the control sequence to call to resume processing.
 4772: % #4, delimited by a space, is the class name.
 4773: % #5 is the method's return type.
 4774: %
 4775: \def\deftypemethparsebody#1#2#3#4 #5 {\begingroup\inENV
 4776:   \medbreak
 4777:   \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
 4778:   \def#2##1 ##2 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}{##2}}}%
 4779:   \parindent=0in
 4780:   \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
 4781:   \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
 4782:   \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#4}{#5}}}
 4783: 
 4784: % Used for @deftypeop.  The change from \deftypemethparsebody is an
 4785: % extra argument at the beginning which is the `category', instead of it
 4786: % being the hardwired string `Method' or `Instance Variable'.  We have
 4787: % to account for this both in the \...x definition and in parsing the
 4788: % input at hand.  Thus also need a control sequence (passed as #5) for
 4789: % the \E... definition to assign the category name to.
 4790: % 
 4791: \def\deftypeopparsebody#1#2#3#4#5 #6 {\begingroup\inENV
 4792:   \medbreak
 4793:   \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
 4794:   \def#2##1 ##2 ##3 {%
 4795:     \def#4{##1}%
 4796:     \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##2}{##3}}}%
 4797:   \parindent=0in
 4798:   \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
 4799:   \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
 4800:   \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#5}{#6}}}
 4801: 
 4802: \def\defopparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV %
 4803: \medbreak %
 4804: % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
 4805: % so that it will exit this group.
 4806: \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
 4807: \def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
 4808: \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
 4809: \parindent=0in
 4810: \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
 4811: \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
 4812: \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#5}}}
 4813: 
 4814: % These parsing functions are similar to the preceding ones
 4815: % except that they do not make parens into active characters.
 4816: % These are used for "variables" since they have no arguments.
 4817: 
 4818: \def\defvarparsebody #1#2#3{\begingroup\inENV% Environment for definitionbody
 4819: \medbreak %
 4820: % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
 4821: % so that it will exit this group.
 4822: \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
 4823: \def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit#3}%
 4824: \parindent=0in
 4825: \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
 4826: \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
 4827: \begingroup %
 4828: \catcode 61=\active %
 4829: \obeylines\spacesplit#3}
 4830: 
 4831: % This is used for \def{tp,vr}parsebody.  It could probably be used for
 4832: % some of the others, too, with some judicious conditionals.
 4833: %
 4834: \def\parsebodycommon#1#2#3{%
 4835:   \begingroup\inENV %
 4836:   \medbreak %
 4837:   % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
 4838:   % so that it will exit this group.
 4839:   \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
 4840:   \def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
 4841:   \parindent=0in
 4842:   \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
 4843:   \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
 4844:   \begingroup\obeylines
 4845: }
 4846: 
 4847: \def\defvrparsebody#1#2#3#4 {%
 4848:   \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
 4849:   \spacesplit{#3{#4}}%
 4850: }
 4851: 
 4852: % This loses on `@deftp {Data Type} {struct termios}' -- it thinks the
 4853: % type is just `struct', because we lose the braces in `{struct
 4854: % termios}' when \spacesplit reads its undelimited argument.  Sigh.
 4855: % \let\deftpparsebody=\defvrparsebody
 4856: %
 4857: % So, to get around this, we put \empty in with the type name.  That
 4858: % way, TeX won't find exactly `{...}' as an undelimited argument, and
 4859: % won't strip off the braces.
 4860: %
 4861: \def\deftpparsebody #1#2#3#4 {%
 4862:   \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
 4863:   \spacesplit{\parsetpheaderline{#3{#4}}}\empty
 4864: }
 4865: 
 4866: % Fine, but then we have to eventually remove the \empty *and* the
 4867: % braces (if any).  That's what this does.
 4868: %
 4869: \def\removeemptybraces\empty#1\relax{#1}
 4870: 
 4871: % After \spacesplit has done its work, this is called -- #1 is the final
 4872: % thing to call, #2 the type name (which starts with \empty), and #3
 4873: % (which might be empty) the arguments.
 4874: %
 4875: \def\parsetpheaderline#1#2#3{%
 4876:   #1{\removeemptybraces#2\relax}{#3}%
 4877: }%
 4878: 
 4879: \def\defopvarparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV %
 4880: \medbreak %
 4881: % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
 4882: % so that it will exit this group.
 4883: \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
 4884: \def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
 4885: \begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
 4886: \parindent=0in
 4887: \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
 4888: \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
 4889: \begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{#5}}}
 4890: 
 4891: % Split up #2 at the first space token.
 4892: % call #1 with two arguments:
 4893: %  the first is all of #2 before the space token,
 4894: %  the second is all of #2 after that space token.
 4895: % If #2 contains no space token, all of it is passed as the first arg
 4896: % and the second is passed as empty.
 4897: 
 4898: {\obeylines
 4899: \gdef\spacesplit#1#2^^M{\endgroup\spacesplitfoo{#1}#2 \relax\spacesplitfoo}%
 4900: \long\gdef\spacesplitfoo#1#2 #3#4\spacesplitfoo{%
 4901: \ifx\relax #3%
 4902: #1{#2}{}\else #1{#2}{#3#4}\fi}}
 4903: 
 4904: % So much for the things common to all kinds of definitions.
 4905: 
 4906: % Define @defun.
 4907: 
 4908: % First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of \defun
 4909: % Use this to expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up
 4910: 
 4911: \def\defunargs#1{\functionparens \sl
 4912: % Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
 4913: % Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
 4914: % Set the font temporarily and use \font in case \setfont made \tensl a macro.
 4915: {\tensl\hyphenchar\font=0}%
 4916: #1%
 4917: {\tensl\hyphenchar\font=45}%
 4918: \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \errmessage{Unbalanced parentheses in @def}\fi%
 4919: \interlinepenalty=10000
 4920: \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
 4921: \endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
 4922: }
 4923: 
 4924: \def\deftypefunargs #1{%
 4925: % Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
 4926: % Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
 4927: % Use \boldbraxnoamp, not \functionparens, so that & is not special.
 4928: \boldbraxnoamp
 4929: \tclose{#1}% avoid \code because of side effects on active chars
 4930: \interlinepenalty=10000
 4931: \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
 4932: \endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
 4933: }
 4934: 
 4935: % Do complete processing of one @defun or @defunx line already parsed.
 4936: 
 4937: % @deffn Command forward-char nchars
 4938: 
 4939: \def\deffn{\defmethparsebody\Edeffn\deffnx\deffnheader}
 4940: 
 4941: \def\deffnheader #1#2#3{\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}%
 4942: \begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defunargs{#3}\endgroup %
 4943: \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
 4944: }
 4945: 
 4946: % @defun == @deffn Function
 4947: 
 4948: \def\defun{\defparsebody\Edefun\defunx\defunheader}
 4949: 
 4950: \def\defunheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
 4951: \begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDeffunc}%
 4952: \defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
 4953: \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
 4954: }
 4955: 
 4956: % @deftypefun int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
 4957: 
 4958: \def\deftypefun{\defparsebody\Edeftypefun\deftypefunx\deftypefunheader}
 4959: 
 4960: % #1 is the data type.  #2 is the name and args.
 4961: \def\deftypefunheader #1#2{\deftypefunheaderx{#1}#2 \relax}
 4962: % #1 is the data type, #2 the name, #3 the args.
 4963: \def\deftypefunheaderx #1#2 #3\relax{%
 4964: \doind {fn}{\code{#2}}% Make entry in function index
 4965: \begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$.$#2}{\putwordDeftypefun}%
 4966: \deftypefunargs {#3}\endgroup %
 4967: \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
 4968: }
 4969: 
 4970: % @deftypefn {Library Function} int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
 4971: 
 4972: \def\deftypefn{\defmethparsebody\Edeftypefn\deftypefnx\deftypefnheader}
 4973: 
 4974: % \defheaderxcond#1\relax$.$
 4975: % puts #1 in @code, followed by a space, but does nothing if #1 is null.
 4976: \def\defheaderxcond#1#2$.${\ifx#1\relax\else\code{#1#2} \fi}
 4977: 
 4978: % #1 is the classification.  #2 is the data type.  #3 is the name and args.
 4979: \def\deftypefnheader #1#2#3{\deftypefnheaderx{#1}{#2}#3 \relax}
 4980: % #1 is the classification, #2 the data type, #3 the name, #4 the args.
 4981: \def\deftypefnheaderx #1#2#3 #4\relax{%
 4982: \doind {fn}{\code{#3}}% Make entry in function index
 4983: \begingroup
 4984: \normalparens % notably, turn off `&' magic, which prevents
 4985: %               at least some C++ text from working
 4986: \defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}{#1}%
 4987: \deftypefunargs {#4}\endgroup %
 4988: \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
 4989: }
 4990: 
 4991: % @defmac == @deffn Macro
 4992: 
 4993: \def\defmac{\defparsebody\Edefmac\defmacx\defmacheader}
 4994: 
 4995: \def\defmacheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
 4996: \begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefmac}%
 4997: \defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
 4998: \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
 4999: }
 5000: 
 5001: % @defspec == @deffn Special Form
 5002: 
 5003: \def\defspec{\defparsebody\Edefspec\defspecx\defspecheader}
 5004: 
 5005: \def\defspecheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
 5006: \begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefspec}%
 5007: \defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
 5008: \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
 5009: }
 5010: 
 5011: % @defop CATEGORY CLASS OPERATION ARG...
 5012: %
 5013: \def\defop #1 {\def\defoptype{#1}%
 5014: \defopparsebody\Edefop\defopx\defopheader\defoptype}
 5015: %
 5016: \def\defopheader#1#2#3{%
 5017: \dosubind {fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ #1}% Make entry in function index
 5018: \begingroup\defname {#2}{\defoptype\ \putwordon\ #1}%
 5019: \defunargs {#3}\endgroup %
 5020: }
 5021: 
 5022: % @deftypeop CATEGORY CLASS TYPE OPERATION ARG...
 5023: %
 5024: \def\deftypeop #1 {\def\deftypeopcategory{#1}%
 5025:   \deftypeopparsebody\Edeftypeop\deftypeopx\deftypeopheader
 5026:                        \deftypeopcategory}
 5027: %
 5028: % #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the operation name, #4 the args.
 5029: \def\deftypeopheader#1#2#3#4{%
 5030:   \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
 5031:   \begingroup
 5032:     \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}
 5033:             {\deftypeopcategory\ \putwordon\ \code{#1}}%
 5034:     \deftypefunargs{#4}%
 5035:   \endgroup
 5036: }
 5037: 
 5038: % @deftypemethod CLASS TYPE METHOD ARG...
 5039: %
 5040: \def\deftypemethod{%
 5041:   \deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypemethod\deftypemethodx\deftypemethodheader}
 5042: %
 5043: % #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the method name, #4 the args.
 5044: \def\deftypemethodheader#1#2#3#4{%
 5045:   \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
 5046:   \begingroup
 5047:     \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}%
 5048:     \deftypefunargs{#4}%
 5049:   \endgroup
 5050: }
 5051: 
 5052: % @deftypeivar CLASS TYPE VARNAME
 5053: %
 5054: \def\deftypeivar{%
 5055:   \deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypeivar\deftypeivarx\deftypeivarheader}
 5056: %
 5057: % #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the variable name.
 5058: \def\deftypeivarheader#1#2#3{%
 5059:   \dosubind{vr}{\code{#3}}{\putwordof\ \code{#1}}% entry in variable index
 5060:   \begingroup
 5061:     \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}
 5062:             {\putwordInstanceVariableof\ \code{#1}}%
 5063:     \defvarargs{#3}%
 5064:   \endgroup
 5065: }
 5066: 
 5067: % @defmethod == @defop Method
 5068: %
 5069: \def\defmethod{\defmethparsebody\Edefmethod\defmethodx\defmethodheader}
 5070: %
 5071: % #1 is the class name, #2 the method name, #3 the args.
 5072: \def\defmethodheader#1#2#3{%
 5073:   \dosubind{fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
 5074:   \begingroup
 5075:     \defname{#2}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}%
 5076:     \defunargs{#3}%
 5077:   \endgroup
 5078: }
 5079: 
 5080: % @defcv {Class Option} foo-class foo-flag
 5081: 
 5082: \def\defcv #1 {\def\defcvtype{#1}%
 5083: \defopvarparsebody\Edefcv\defcvx\defcvarheader\defcvtype}
 5084: 
 5085: \def\defcvarheader #1#2#3{%
 5086: \dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{\putwordof\ #1}% Make entry in var index
 5087: \begingroup\defname {#2}{\defcvtype\ \putwordof\ #1}%
 5088: \defvarargs {#3}\endgroup %
 5089: }
 5090: 
 5091: % @defivar CLASS VARNAME == @defcv {Instance Variable} CLASS VARNAME
 5092: %
 5093: \def\defivar{\defvrparsebody\Edefivar\defivarx\defivarheader}
 5094: %
 5095: \def\defivarheader#1#2#3{%
 5096:   \dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{\putwordof\ #1}% entry in var index
 5097:   \begingroup
 5098:     \defname{#2}{\putwordInstanceVariableof\ #1}%
 5099:     \defvarargs{#3}%
 5100:   \endgroup
 5101: }
 5102: 
 5103: % @defvar
 5104: % First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of @defvar.
 5105: % This is actually simple: just print them in roman.
 5106: % This must expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up
 5107: \def\defvarargs #1{\normalparens #1%
 5108: \interlinepenalty=10000
 5109: \endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak}
 5110: 
 5111: % @defvr Counter foo-count
 5112: 
 5113: \def\defvr{\defvrparsebody\Edefvr\defvrx\defvrheader}
 5114: 
 5115: \def\defvrheader #1#2#3{\doind {vr}{\code{#2}}%
 5116: \begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defvarargs{#3}\endgroup}
 5117: 
 5118: % @defvar == @defvr Variable
 5119: 
 5120: \def\defvar{\defvarparsebody\Edefvar\defvarx\defvarheader}
 5121: 
 5122: \def\defvarheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
 5123: \begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefvar}%
 5124: \defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
 5125: }
 5126: 
 5127: % @defopt == @defvr {User Option}
 5128: 
 5129: \def\defopt{\defvarparsebody\Edefopt\defoptx\defoptheader}
 5130: 
 5131: \def\defoptheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
 5132: \begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefopt}%
 5133: \defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
 5134: }
 5135: 
 5136: % @deftypevar int foobar
 5137: 
 5138: \def\deftypevar{\defvarparsebody\Edeftypevar\deftypevarx\deftypevarheader}
 5139: 
 5140: % #1 is the data type.  #2 is the name, perhaps followed by text that
 5141: % is actually part of the data type, which should not be put into the index.
 5142: \def\deftypevarheader #1#2{%
 5143: \dovarind#2 \relax% Make entry in variables index
 5144: \begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$.$#2}{\putwordDeftypevar}%
 5145: \interlinepenalty=10000
 5146: \endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
 5147: \endgroup}
 5148: \def\dovarind#1 #2\relax{\doind{vr}{\code{#1}}}
 5149: 
 5150: % @deftypevr {Global Flag} int enable
 5151: 
 5152: \def\deftypevr{\defvrparsebody\Edeftypevr\deftypevrx\deftypevrheader}
 5153: 
 5154: \def\deftypevrheader #1#2#3{\dovarind#3 \relax%
 5155: \begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}{#1}
 5156: \interlinepenalty=10000
 5157: \endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
 5158: \endgroup}
 5159: 
 5160: % Now define @deftp
 5161: % Args are printed in bold, a slight difference from @defvar.
 5162: 
 5163: \def\deftpargs #1{\bf \defvarargs{#1}}
 5164: 
 5165: % @deftp Class window height width ...
 5166: 
 5167: \def\deftp{\deftpparsebody\Edeftp\deftpx\deftpheader}
 5168: 
 5169: \def\deftpheader #1#2#3{\doind {tp}{\code{#2}}%
 5170: \begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\deftpargs{#3}\endgroup}
 5171: 
 5172: % These definitions are used if you use @defunx (etc.)
 5173: % anywhere other than immediately after a @defun or @defunx.
 5174: % 
 5175: \def\defcvx#1 {\errmessage{@defcvx in invalid context}}
 5176: \def\deffnx#1 {\errmessage{@deffnx in invalid context}}
 5177: \def\defivarx#1 {\errmessage{@defivarx in invalid context}}
 5178: \def\defmacx#1 {\errmessage{@defmacx in invalid context}}
 5179: \def\defmethodx#1 {\errmessage{@defmethodx in invalid context}}
 5180: \def\defoptx #1 {\errmessage{@defoptx in invalid context}}
 5181: \def\defopx#1 {\errmessage{@defopx in invalid context}}
 5182: \def\defspecx#1 {\errmessage{@defspecx in invalid context}}
 5183: \def\deftpx#1 {\errmessage{@deftpx in invalid context}}
 5184: \def\deftypefnx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypefnx in invalid context}}
 5185: \def\deftypefunx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypefunx in invalid context}}
 5186: \def\deftypeivarx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypeivarx in invalid context}}
 5187: \def\deftypemethodx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypemethodx in invalid context}}
 5188: \def\deftypeopx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypeopx in invalid context}}
 5189: \def\deftypevarx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypevarx in invalid context}}
 5190: \def\deftypevrx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypevrx in invalid context}}
 5191: \def\defunx#1 {\errmessage{@defunx in invalid context}}
 5192: \def\defvarx#1 {\errmessage{@defvarx in invalid context}}
 5193: \def\defvrx#1 {\errmessage{@defvrx in invalid context}}
 5194: 
 5195: 
 5196: \message{macros,}
 5197: % @macro.
 5198: 
 5199: % To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
 5200: % which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
 5201: \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
 5202:  \newwrite\macscribble
 5203:  \def\scanmacro#1{%
 5204:    \begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M
 5205:    % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
 5206:    \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=12 \escapechar=`\@
 5207:    % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline.
 5208:    \toks0={#1\endinput}%
 5209:    \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
 5210:    \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
 5211:    \immediate\closeout\macscribble
 5212:    \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
 5213:    \input \jobname.tmp
 5214:    \endgroup
 5215: }
 5216: \else
 5217: \def\scanmacro#1{%
 5218: \begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M
 5219: % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
 5220: \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=12 \escapechar=`\@
 5221: \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces\scantokens{#1\endinput}\endgroup}
 5222: \fi
 5223: 
 5224: \newcount\paramno   % Count of parameters
 5225: \newtoks\macname    % Macro name
 5226: \newif\ifrecursive  % Is it recursive?
 5227: \def\macrolist{}    % List of all defined macros in the form
 5228:                     % \do\macro1\do\macro2...
 5229: 
 5230: % Utility routines.
 5231: % Thisdoes \let #1 = #2, except with \csnames.
 5232: \def\cslet#1#2{%
 5233: \expandafter\expandafter
 5234: \expandafter\let
 5235: \expandafter\expandafter
 5236: \csname#1\endcsname
 5237: \csname#2\endcsname}
 5238: 
 5239: % Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
 5240: % Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
 5241: {\catcode`\@=11
 5242: \gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }}
 5243: \gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@}
 5244: \gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @}
 5245: \def\unbrace#1{#1}
 5246: \unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1}
 5247: }
 5248: 
 5249: % Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
 5250: {\catcode`\^^M=12\catcode`\Q=3%
 5251: \gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}%
 5252: \gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}%
 5253: \gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}%
 5254: }
 5255: 
 5256: % Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where
 5257: % all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
 5258: % (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \.
 5259: 
 5260: % It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is
 5261: % done by  making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
 5262: % body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
 5263: 
 5264: \def\macrobodyctxt{%
 5265:   \catcode`\~=12
 5266:   \catcode`\^=12
 5267:   \catcode`\_=12
 5268:   \catcode`\|=12
 5269:   \catcode`\<=12
 5270:   \catcode`\>=12
 5271:   \catcode`\+=12
 5272:   \catcode`\{=12
 5273:   \catcode`\}=12
 5274:   \catcode`\@=12
 5275:   \catcode`\^^M=12
 5276:   \usembodybackslash}
 5277: 
 5278: \def\macroargctxt{%
 5279:   \catcode`\~=12
 5280:   \catcode`\^=12
 5281:   \catcode`\_=12
 5282:   \catcode`\|=12
 5283:   \catcode`\<=12
 5284:   \catcode`\>=12
 5285:   \catcode`\+=12
 5286:   \catcode`\@=12
 5287:   \catcode`\\=12}
 5288: 
 5289: % \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
 5290: % It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
 5291: % where N is the macro parameter number.
 5292: % We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so
 5293: % \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.
 5294: 
 5295: {\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active
 5296:  @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash}
 5297:  @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname}
 5298: }
 5299: \expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash}
 5300: 
 5301: \def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx}
 5302: \def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx}
 5303: 
 5304: \def\macroxxx#1{%
 5305:   \getargs{#1}%           now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
 5306:   \ifx\argl\empty       % no arguments
 5307:      \paramno=0%
 5308:   \else
 5309:      \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;%
 5310:   \fi
 5311:   \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname
 5312:      \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}%
 5313:   \else
 5314:      \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax
 5315:      \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi
 5316:      \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
 5317:      \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1%
 5318:      % Add the macroname to \macrolist
 5319:      \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\do}%
 5320:      \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0
 5321:        \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname\endcsname}%
 5322:   \fi
 5323:   \begingroup \macrobodyctxt
 5324:   \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
 5325:   \else \expandafter\parsemacbody
 5326:   \fi}
 5327: 
 5328: \def\unmacro{\parsearg\unmacroxxx}
 5329: \def\unmacroxxx#1{%
 5330:   \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname
 5331:     \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
 5332:     \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0%
 5333:     % Remove the macro name from \macrolist
 5334:     \begingroup
 5335:       \edef\tempa{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}%
 5336:       \def\do##1{%
 5337:         \def\tempb{##1}%
 5338:         \ifx\tempa\tempb
 5339:           % remove this
 5340:         \else
 5341:           \toks0 = \expandafter{\newmacrolist\do}%
 5342:           \edef\newmacrolist{\the\toks0\expandafter\noexpand\tempa}%
 5343:         \fi}%
 5344:       \def\newmacrolist{}%
 5345:       % Execute macro list to define \newmacrolist
 5346:       \macrolist
 5347:       \global\let\macrolist\newmacrolist
 5348:     \endgroup
 5349:   \else
 5350:     \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}%
 5351:   \fi
 5352: }
 5353: 
 5354: % This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a
 5355: % <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
 5356: % an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
 5357: \def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}}
 5358: \def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs}
 5359: \def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
 5360: \def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}}
 5361: 
 5362: % Parse the optional {params} list.  Set up \paramno and \paramlist
 5363: % so \defmacro knows what to do.  Define \macarg.blah for each blah
 5364: % in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list.
 5365: % That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).
 5366: 
 5367: % We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions.
 5368: % The technique used is stolen from LaTeX:  let \hash be something
 5369: % unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine
 5370: % it to # just before using the token list produced.
 5371: %
 5372: % The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before
 5373: % the macro is used.
 5374: 
 5375: \def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
 5376:         \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,}
 5377: \def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{%
 5378:   \if#1;\let\next=\relax
 5379:   \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx
 5380:     \advance\paramno by 1%
 5381:     \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
 5382:         {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}%
 5383:     \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}%
 5384:   \fi\next}
 5385: 
 5386: % These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies.
 5387: % (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
 5388: 
 5389: \long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro%
 5390: {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
 5391: \long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro%
 5392: {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
 5393: 
 5394: % This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and
 5395: % nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments.
 5396: % Much magic with \expandafter here.
 5397: % \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file
 5398: % they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group.
 5399: \def\defmacro{%
 5400:   \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars
 5401:   \ifrecursive
 5402:     \ifcase\paramno
 5403:     % 0
 5404:       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
 5405:         \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
 5406:     \or % 1
 5407:       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
 5408:          \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
 5409:          \noexpand\braceorline
 5410:          \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
 5411:       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
 5412:          \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
 5413:     \else % many
 5414:       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
 5415:          \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
 5416:          \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
 5417:       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
 5418:           \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
 5419:       \expandafter\expandafter
 5420:       \expandafter\xdef
 5421:       \expandafter\expandafter
 5422:         \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
 5423:           \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
 5424:     \fi
 5425:   \else
 5426:     \ifcase\paramno
 5427:     % 0
 5428:       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
 5429:         \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
 5430:         \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
 5431:     \or % 1
 5432:       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
 5433:          \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
 5434:          \noexpand\braceorline
 5435:          \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
 5436:       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
 5437:         \egroup
 5438:         \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
 5439:         \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
 5440:     \else % many
 5441:       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
 5442:          \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
 5443:          \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
 5444:       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
 5445:           \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
 5446:       \expandafter\expandafter
 5447:       \expandafter\xdef
 5448:       \expandafter\expandafter
 5449:       \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
 5450:       \paramlist{%
 5451:           \egroup
 5452:           \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
 5453:           \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
 5454:     \fi
 5455:   \fi}
 5456: 
 5457: \def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}}
 5458: 
 5459: % \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a
 5460: % {.  If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole
 5461: % line.  Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence
 5462: % as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg)
 5463: \def\braceorline#1{\let\next=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
 5464: \def\braceorlinexxx{%
 5465:   \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else
 5466:     \expandafter\parsearg
 5467:   \fi \next}
 5468: 
 5469: % We mant to disable all macros during \shipout so that they are not
 5470: % expanded by \write.
 5471: \def\turnoffmacros{\begingroup \def\do##1{\let\noexpand##1=\relax}%
 5472:   \edef\next{\macrolist}\expandafter\endgroup\next}
 5473: 
 5474: 
 5475: % @alias.
 5476: % We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal
 5477: % sign.  Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
 5478: \def\alias{\begingroup\obeyspaces\parsearg\aliasxxx}
 5479: \def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax}
 5480: \def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{\ignoreactivespaces
 5481: \edef\next{\global\let\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname=%
 5482:            \expandafter\noexpand\csname#2\endcsname}%
 5483: \expandafter\endgroup\next}
 5484: 
 5485: 
 5486: \message{cross references,}
 5487: % @xref etc.
 5488: 
 5489: \newwrite\auxfile
 5490: 
 5491: \newif\ifhavexrefs    % True if xref values are known.
 5492: \newif\ifwarnedxrefs  % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
 5493: 
 5494: % @inforef is relatively simple.
 5495: \def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
 5496: \def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
 5497:   node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
 5498: 
 5499: % @node's job is to define \lastnode.
 5500: \def\node{\ENVcheck\parsearg\nodezzz}
 5501: \def\nodezzz#1{\nodexxx [#1,]}
 5502: \def\nodexxx[#1,#2]{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
 5503: \let\nwnode=\node
 5504: \let\lastnode=\relax
 5505: 
 5506: % The sectioning commands (@chapter, etc.) call these.
 5507: \def\donoderef{%
 5508:   \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
 5509:     \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}%
 5510:       {Ysectionnumberandtype}%
 5511:     \global\let\lastnode=\relax
 5512:   \fi
 5513: }
 5514: \def\unnumbnoderef{%
 5515:   \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
 5516:     \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}{Ynothing}%
 5517:     \global\let\lastnode=\relax
 5518:   \fi
 5519: }
 5520: \def\appendixnoderef{%
 5521:   \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
 5522:     \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}%
 5523:       {Yappendixletterandtype}%
 5524:     \global\let\lastnode=\relax
 5525:   \fi
 5526: }
 5527: 
 5528: 
 5529: % @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
 5530: %
 5531: \newcount\savesfregister
 5532: \gdef\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
 5533: \gdef\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
 5534: \gdef\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
 5535: 
 5536: % \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME, namely
 5537: % NAME-title, NAME-pg, and NAME-SNT.  Called from \foonoderef.  We have
 5538: % to set \indexdummies so commands such as @code in a section title
 5539: % aren't expanded.  It would be nicer not to expand the titles in the
 5540: % first place, but there's so many layers that that is hard to do.
 5541: %
 5542: \def\setref#1#2{{%
 5543:   \indexdummies
 5544:   \pdfmkdest{#1}%
 5545:   \dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}%
 5546:   \dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}%
 5547:   \dosetq{#1-snt}{#2}%
 5548: }}
 5549: 
 5550: % @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references.  For \xrefX, #1 is
 5551: % the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
 5552: % node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed
 5553: % manual.  All but the node name can be omitted.
 5554: %
 5555: \def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
 5556: \def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
 5557: \def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
 5558: \def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
 5559:   \unsepspaces
 5560:   \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
 5561:   \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #3}%
 5562:   \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual}%
 5563:   \setbox0=\hbox{\printednodename}%
 5564:   \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt
 5565:     % No printed node name was explicitly given.
 5566:     \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax
 5567:       % Use the node name inside the square brackets.
 5568:       \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
 5569:     \else
 5570:       % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside
 5571:       % the square brackets.  Use the real section title if we have it.
 5572:       \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
 5573:         % It is in another manual, so we don't have it.
 5574:         \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
 5575:       \else
 5576:         \ifhavexrefs
 5577:           % We know the real title if we have the xref values.
 5578:           \def\printednodename{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
 5579:         \else
 5580:           % Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
 5581:           \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
 5582:         \fi%
 5583:       \fi
 5584:     \fi
 5585:   \fi
 5586:   %
 5587:   % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not
 5588:   % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will
 5589:   % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names.  Since some manuals
 5590:   % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this
 5591:   % is a loss.  Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it
 5592:   % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
 5593:   \ifpdf
 5594:     \leavevmode
 5595:     \getfilename{#4}%
 5596:     {\normalturnoffactive
 5597:      \ifnum\filenamelength>0
 5598:        \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
 5599:          goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{#1}%
 5600:      \else
 5601:        \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
 5602:          goto name{#1}%
 5603:      \fi
 5604:     }%
 5605:     \linkcolor
 5606:   \fi
 5607:   %
 5608:   \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
 5609:     \putwordsection{} ``\printednodename'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
 5610:   \else
 5611:     % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
 5612:     % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
 5613:     % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
 5614:     % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
 5615:     % printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
 5616:     {\normalturnoffactive
 5617:      % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
 5618:      % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
 5619:      \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
 5620:      \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
 5621:     }%
 5622:     % [mynode],
 5623:     [\printednodename],\space
 5624:     % page 3
 5625:     \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
 5626:   \fi
 5627:   \endlink
 5628: \endgroup}
 5629: 
 5630: % \dosetq is the interface for calls from other macros
 5631: 
 5632: % Use \normalturnoffactive so that punctuation chars such as underscore
 5633: % and backslash work in node names.  (\turnoffactive doesn't do \.)
 5634: \def\dosetq#1#2{%
 5635:   {\let\folio=0%
 5636:    \normalturnoffactive
 5637:    \edef\next{\write\auxfile{\internalsetq{#1}{#2}}}%
 5638:    \iflinks
 5639:      \next
 5640:    \fi
 5641:   }%
 5642: }
 5643: 
 5644: % \internalsetq {foo}{page} expands into
 5645: % CHARACTERS 'xrdef {foo}{...expansion of \Ypage...}
 5646: % When the aux file is read, ' is the escape character
 5647: 
 5648: \def\internalsetq #1#2{'xrdef {#1}{\csname #2\endcsname}}
 5649: 
 5650: % Things to be expanded by \internalsetq
 5651: 
 5652: \def\Ypagenumber{\folio}
 5653: 
 5654: \def\Ytitle{\thissection}
 5655: 
 5656: \def\Ynothing{}
 5657: 
 5658: \def\Ysectionnumberandtype{%
 5659: \ifnum\secno=0 \putwordChapter\xreftie\the\chapno %
 5660: \else \ifnum \subsecno=0 \putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno %
 5661: \else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 %
 5662: \putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno %
 5663: \else %
 5664: \putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno %
 5665: \fi \fi \fi }
 5666: 
 5667: \def\Yappendixletterandtype{%
 5668: \ifnum\secno=0 \putwordAppendix\xreftie'char\the\appendixno{}%
 5669: \else \ifnum \subsecno=0 \putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno %
 5670: \else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 %
 5671: \putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno %
 5672: \else %
 5673: \putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno %
 5674: \fi \fi \fi }
 5675: 
 5676: \gdef\xreftie{'tie}
 5677: 
 5678: % Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
 5679: % messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
 5680: %
 5681: \ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
 5682:   \let\linenumber = \empty % Non-3.0.
 5683: \else
 5684:   \def\linenumber{\the\inputlineno:\space}
 5685: \fi
 5686: 
 5687: % Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
 5688: % If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
 5689: 
 5690: \def\refx#1#2{%
 5691:   \expandafter\ifx\csname X#1\endcsname\relax
 5692:     % If not defined, say something at least.
 5693:     \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
 5694:     \iflinks
 5695:       \ifhavexrefs
 5696:         \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}%
 5697:       \else
 5698:         \ifwarnedxrefs\else
 5699:           \global\warnedxrefstrue
 5700:           \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}%
 5701:         \fi
 5702:       \fi
 5703:     \fi
 5704:   \else
 5705:     % It's defined, so just use it.
 5706:     \csname X#1\endcsname
 5707:   \fi
 5708:   #2% Output the suffix in any case.
 5709: }
 5710: 
 5711: % This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file.
 5712: %
 5713: \def\xrdef#1{\begingroup
 5714:   % Reenable \ as an escape while reading the second argument.
 5715:   \catcode`\\ = 0
 5716:   \afterassignment\endgroup
 5717:   \expandafter\gdef\csname X#1\endcsname
 5718: }
 5719: 
 5720: % Read the last existing aux file, if any.  No error if none exists.
 5721: \def\readauxfile{\begingroup
 5722:   \catcode`\^^@=\other
 5723:   \catcode`\^^A=\other
 5724:   \catcode`\^^B=\other
 5725:   \catcode`\^^C=\other
 5726:   \catcode`\^^D=\other
 5727:   \catcode`\^^E=\other
 5728:   \catcode`\^^F=\other
 5729:   \catcode`\^^G=\other
 5730:   \catcode`\^^H=\other
 5731:   \catcode`\^^K=\other
 5732:   \catcode`\^^L=\other
 5733:   \catcode`\^^N=\other
 5734:   \catcode`\^^P=\other
 5735:   \catcode`\^^Q=\other
 5736:   \catcode`\^^R=\other
 5737:   \catcode`\^^S=\other
 5738:   \catcode`\^^T=\other
 5739:   \catcode`\^^U=\other
 5740:   \catcode`\^^V=\other
 5741:   \catcode`\^^W=\other
 5742:   \catcode`\^^X=\other
 5743:   \catcode`\^^Z=\other
 5744:   \catcode`\^^[=\other
 5745:   \catcode`\^^\=\other
 5746:   \catcode`\^^]=\other
 5747:   \catcode`\^^^=\other
 5748:   \catcode`\^^_=\other
 5749:   \catcode`\@=\other
 5750:   \catcode`\^=\other
 5751:   % It was suggested to define this as 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
 5752:   % in xref tags, i.e., node names.  But since ^^e4 notation isn't
 5753:   % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable.  Furthermore,
 5754:   % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^
 5755:   % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat
 5756:   % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first
 5757:   % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence.  It could
 5758:   % all be worked out, but why?  Either we support ^^ or we don't.
 5759:   %
 5760:   % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat:
 5761:   % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter
 5762:   % and then to call \auxhat in \setq.
 5763:   %
 5764:   \catcode`\~=\other
 5765:   \catcode`\[=\other
 5766:   \catcode`\]=\other
 5767:   \catcode`\"=\other
 5768:   \catcode`\_=\other
 5769:   \catcode`\|=\other
 5770:   \catcode`\<=\other
 5771:   \catcode`\>=\other
 5772:   \catcode`\$=\other
 5773:   \catcode`\#=\other
 5774:   \catcode`\&=\other
 5775:   \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
 5776:   % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters
 5777:   {%
 5778:     \count 1=128
 5779:     \def\loop{%
 5780:       \catcode\count 1=\other
 5781:       \advance\count 1 by 1
 5782:       \ifnum \count 1<256 \loop \fi
 5783:     }%
 5784:   }%
 5785:   % The aux file uses ' as the escape (for now).
 5786:   % Turn off \ as an escape so we do not lose on
 5787:   % entries which were dumped with control sequences in their names.
 5788:   % For example, 'xrdef {$\leq $-fun}{page ...} made by @defun ^^
 5789:   % Reference to such entries still does not work the way one would wish,
 5790:   % but at least they do not bomb out when the aux file is read in.
 5791:   \catcode`\{=1
 5792:   \catcode`\}=2
 5793:   \catcode`\%=\other
 5794:   \catcode`\'=0
 5795:   \catcode`\\=\other
 5796:   %
 5797:   \openin 1 \jobname.aux
 5798:   \ifeof 1 \else
 5799:     \closein 1
 5800:     \input \jobname.aux
 5801:     \global\havexrefstrue
 5802:     \global\warnedobstrue
 5803:   \fi
 5804:   % Open the new aux file.  TeX will close it automatically at exit.
 5805:   \openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
 5806: \endgroup}
 5807: 
 5808: 
 5809: % Footnotes.
 5810: 
 5811: \newcount \footnoteno
 5812: 
 5813: % The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is
 5814: % vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a
 5815: % pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is
 5816: % removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a
 5817: % space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
 5818: \def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
 5819: 
 5820: % @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only.
 5821: \let\footnotestyle=\comment
 5822: 
 5823: \let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
 5824: 
 5825: {\catcode `\@=11
 5826: %
 5827: % Auto-number footnotes.  Otherwise like plain.
 5828: \gdef\footnote{%
 5829:   \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
 5830:   \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
 5831:   %
 5832:   % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
 5833:   % extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
 5834:   \let\@sf\empty
 5835:   \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\/\fi
 5836:   %
 5837:   % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
 5838:   \unskip
 5839:   \thisfootno\@sf
 5840:   \footnotezzz
 5841: }%
 5842: 
 5843: % Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
 5844: % footnote text as a parameter.  Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
 5845: %
 5846: % Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset and anything else that uses
 5847: % \parseargline fail inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
 5848: % the footnote is read.  --karl, 16nov96.
 5849: %
 5850: \long\gdef\footnotezzz{\insert\footins\bgroup
 5851:   % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
 5852:   % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
 5853:   % So reset some parameters.
 5854:   \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
 5855:   \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
 5856:   \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
 5857:   \floatingpenalty\@MM
 5858:   \leftskip\z@skip
 5859:   \rightskip\z@skip
 5860:   \spaceskip\z@skip
 5861:   \xspaceskip\z@skip
 5862:   \parindent\defaultparindent
 5863:   %
 5864:   \smallfonts \rm
 5865:   %
 5866:   % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears
 5867:   % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op.  makeinfo does not use
 5868:   % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote
 5869:   % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style).
 5870:   \let\noindent = \relax
 5871:   %
 5872:   % Hang the footnote text off the number.  Use \everypar in case the
 5873:   % footnote extends for more than one paragraph.
 5874:   \everypar = {\hang}%
 5875:   \textindent{\thisfootno}%
 5876:   %
 5877:   % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text.  Since this
 5878:   % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
 5879:   % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
 5880:   \footstrut
 5881:   \futurelet\next\fo@t
 5882: }
 5883: \def\fo@t{\ifcat\bgroup\noexpand\next \let\next\f@@t
 5884:   \else\let\next\f@t\fi \next}
 5885: \def\f@@t{\bgroup\aftergroup\@foot\let\next}
 5886: \def\f@t#1{#1\@foot}
 5887: \def\@foot{\strut\par\egroup}
 5888: 
 5889: }%end \catcode `\@=11
 5890: 
 5891: % @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line.  It should
 5892: % surround any changed text.  This approach does *not* work if the
 5893: % change spans more than two lines of output.  To handle that, we would
 5894: % have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
 5895: % vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).
 5896: %
 5897: \def\|{%
 5898:   % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
 5899:   \leavevmode
 5900:   %
 5901:   % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
 5902:   \vadjust{%
 5903:     % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
 5904:     % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
 5905:     \vskip-\baselineskip
 5906:     %
 5907:     % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type.  So
 5908:     % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
 5909:     \llap{%
 5910:       %
 5911:       % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
 5912:       \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
 5913:       %
 5914:       % This is the space between the bar and the text.
 5915:       \hskip 12pt
 5916:     }%
 5917:   }%
 5918: }
 5919: 
 5920: % For a final copy, take out the rectangles
 5921: % that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
 5922: % that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
 5923: %
 5924: \def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt}
 5925: 
 5926: % @image.  We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
 5927: % If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
 5928: %
 5929: % Check for and read epsf.tex up front.  If we read it only at @image
 5930: % time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get
 5931: % undone and the next image would fail.
 5932: \openin 1 = epsf.tex
 5933: \ifeof 1 \else
 5934:   \closein 1
 5935:   % Do not bother showing banner with post-v2.7 epsf.tex (available in
 5936:   % doc/epsf.tex until it shows up on ctan).
 5937:   \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
 5938:   \input epsf.tex
 5939: \fi
 5940: %
 5941: % We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
 5942: \newif\ifwarnednoepsf
 5943: \newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to
 5944:   work.  It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get
 5945:   it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.}
 5946: %
 5947: \def\image#1{%
 5948:   \ifx\epsfbox\undefined
 5949:     \ifwarnednoepsf \else
 5950:       \errhelp = \noepsfhelp
 5951:       \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}%
 5952:       \global\warnednoepsftrue
 5953:     \fi
 5954:   \else
 5955:     \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish
 5956:   \fi
 5957: }
 5958: %
 5959: % Arguments to @image:
 5960: % #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.
 5961: % #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
 5962: % #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text.
 5963: % #5 is (ignored optional) extension.
 5964: % #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff.
 5965: \newif\ifimagevmode
 5966: \def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup
 5967:   \catcode`\^^M = 5     % in case we're inside an example
 5968:   \normalturnoffactive  % allow _ et al. in names
 5969:   % If the image is by itself, center it.
 5970:   \ifvmode
 5971:     \imagevmodetrue
 5972:     \nobreak\bigskip
 5973:     % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert
 5974:     % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space
 5975:     % above and below. 
 5976:     \nobreak\vskip\parskip
 5977:     \nobreak
 5978:     \line\bgroup\hss
 5979:   \fi
 5980:   %
 5981:   % Output the image.
 5982:   \ifpdf
 5983:     \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}%
 5984:   \else
 5985:     % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
 5986:     \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
 5987:     \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
 5988:     \epsfbox{#1.eps}%
 5989:   \fi
 5990:   %
 5991:   \ifimagevmode \hss \egroup \bigbreak \fi  % space after the image
 5992: \endgroup}
 5993: 
 5994: 
 5995: \message{localization,}
 5996: % and i18n.
 5997: 
 5998: % @documentlanguage is usually given very early, just after
 5999: % @setfilename.  If done too late, it may not override everything
 6000: % properly.  Single argument is the language abbreviation.
 6001: % It would be nice if we could set up a hyphenation file here.
 6002: %
 6003: \def\documentlanguage{\parsearg\dodocumentlanguage}
 6004: \def\dodocumentlanguage#1{%
 6005:   \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX.
 6006:   % Read the file if it exists.
 6007:   \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
 6008:   \ifeof1
 6009:     \errhelp = \nolanghelp
 6010:     \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}%
 6011:     \let\temp = \relax
 6012:   \else
 6013:     \def\temp{\input txi-#1.tex }%
 6014:   \fi
 6015:   \temp
 6016:   \endgroup
 6017: }
 6018: \newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or
 6019: is empty.  Maybe you need to install it?  In the current directory
 6020: should work if nowhere else does.}
 6021: 
 6022: 
 6023: % @documentencoding should change something in TeX eventually, most
 6024: % likely, but for now just recognize it.
 6025: \let\documentencoding = \comment
 6026: 
 6027: 
 6028: % Page size parameters.
 6029: %
 6030: \newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt
 6031: 
 6032: \chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
 6033: \secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt
 6034: \subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
 6035: 
 6036: % Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
 6037: \vbadness = 10000
 6038: 
 6039: % Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
 6040: \hbadness = 2000
 6041: 
 6042: % Following George Bush, just get rid of widows and orphans.
 6043: \widowpenalty=10000
 6044: \clubpenalty=10000
 6045: 
 6046: % Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're
 6047: % using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.  We want the amount of
 6048: % stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on
 6049: % \hsize.  We call this whenever the paper size is set.
 6050: %
 6051: \def\setemergencystretch{%
 6052:   \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined
 6053:     % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.
 6054:     \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}%
 6055:   \else
 6056:     \emergencystretch = .15\hsize
 6057:   \fi
 6058: }
 6059: 
 6060: % Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 3) voffset;
 6061: % 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip.  We also call
 6062: % \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define \textleading.
 6063: % The caller should also set \parskip.
 6064: %
 6065: \def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
 6066:   \voffset = #3\relax
 6067:   \topskip = #6\relax
 6068:   \splittopskip = \topskip
 6069:   %
 6070:   \vsize = #1\relax
 6071:   \advance\vsize by \topskip
 6072:   \outervsize = \vsize
 6073:   \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin
 6074:   \pageheight = \vsize
 6075:   %
 6076:   \hsize = #2\relax
 6077:   \outerhsize = \hsize
 6078:   \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
 6079:   \pagewidth = \hsize
 6080:   %
 6081:   \normaloffset = #4\relax
 6082:   \bindingoffset = #5\relax
 6083:   %
 6084:   \setleading{\textleading}
 6085:   %
 6086:   \parindent = \defaultparindent
 6087:   \setemergencystretch
 6088: }
 6089: 
 6090: % Use `small' versions.
 6091: % 
 6092: \def\smallenvironments{%
 6093:   \let\smalldisplay = \smalldisplayx
 6094:   \let\smallexample = \smalllispx
 6095:   \let\smallformat = \smallformatx
 6096:   \let\smalllisp = \smalllispx
 6097: }
 6098: 
 6099: % @letterpaper (the default).
 6100: \def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
 6101:   \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
 6102:   \textleading = 13.2pt
 6103:   %
 6104:   % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
 6105:   \internalpagesizes{46\baselineskip}{6in}{\voffset}{.25in}{\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
 6106: }}
 6107: 
 6108: % Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.5 (or so) format.
 6109: \def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1
 6110:   \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt
 6111:   \textleading = 12pt
 6112:   %
 6113:   \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5.in}{\voffset}{.25in}{\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
 6114:   %
 6115:   \lispnarrowing = 0.3in
 6116:   \tolerance = 700
 6117:   \hfuzz = 1pt
 6118:   \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
 6119:   \deftypemargin = 0pt
 6120:   \defbodyindent = .5cm
 6121:   \smallenvironments
 6122: }}
 6123: 
 6124: % Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
 6125: \def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
 6126:   \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
 6127:   \textleading = 12pt
 6128:   %
 6129:   \internalpagesizes{53\baselineskip}{160mm}{\voffset}{4mm}{\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
 6130:   %
 6131:   \tolerance = 700
 6132:   \hfuzz = 1pt
 6133: }}
 6134: 
 6135: % Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper.
 6136: % From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000.
 6137: % He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small.
 6138: \def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1
 6139:   \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt
 6140:   \textleading = 12.5pt
 6141:   %
 6142:   \internalpagesizes{166mm}{120mm}{\voffset}{-8mm}{\bindingoffset}{8pt}%
 6143:   %
 6144:   \lispnarrowing = 0.2in
 6145:   \tolerance = 800
 6146:   \hfuzz = 1.2pt
 6147:   \contentsrightmargin = 0mm
 6148:   \deftypemargin = 0pt
 6149:   \defbodyindent = 2mm
 6150:   \tableindent = 12mm
 6151:   %
 6152:   \smallenvironments
 6153: }}
 6154: 
 6155: % A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper.  Top margin
 6156: % 29mm, hence bottom margin 28mm, nominal side margin 3cm.
 6157: \def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1
 6158:   \textleading = 13.6pt
 6159:   %
 6160:   \afourpaper
 6161:   \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}{3.6mm}{3.6mm}{3mm}{7mm}%
 6162:   %
 6163:   % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper, apparently,
 6164:   % although this does not entirely make sense.
 6165:   \globaldefs = 0
 6166: }}
 6167: 
 6168: % Use @afourwide to print on European A4 paper in wide format.
 6169: \def\afourwide{%
 6170:   \afourpaper
 6171:   \internalpagesizes{6.5in}{9.5in}{\hoffset}{\normaloffset}{\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
 6172: }
 6173: 
 6174: % @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]
 6175: % Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
 6176: % and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
 6177: %
 6178: \def\pagesizes{\parsearg\pagesizesxxx}
 6179: \def\pagesizesxxx#1{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
 6180: \def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
 6181:   \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
 6182:   \globaldefs = 1
 6183:   %
 6184:   \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
 6185:   \setleading{\textleading}%
 6186:   %
 6187:   \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}{\voffset}{\normaloffset}{\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
 6188: }}
 6189: 
 6190: % Set default to letter.
 6191: %
 6192: \letterpaper
 6193: 
 6194: 
 6195: \message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
 6196: 
 6197: % Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
 6198: \catcode`\"=\other
 6199: \catcode`\~=\other
 6200: \catcode`\^=\other
 6201: \catcode`\_=\other
 6202: \catcode`\|=\other
 6203: \catcode`\<=\other
 6204: \catcode`\>=\other
 6205: \catcode`\+=\other
 6206: \catcode`\$=\other
 6207: \def\normaldoublequote{"}
 6208: \def\normaltilde{~}
 6209: \def\normalcaret{^}
 6210: \def\normalunderscore{_}
 6211: \def\normalverticalbar{|}
 6212: \def\normalless{<}
 6213: \def\normalgreater{>}
 6214: \def\normalplus{+}
 6215: \def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix
 6216: 
 6217: % This macro is used to make a character print one way in ttfont
 6218: % where it can probably just be output, and another way in other fonts,
 6219: % where something hairier probably needs to be done.
 6220: %
 6221: % #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
 6222: % otherwise.  Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero
 6223: % interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all
 6224: % typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter.
 6225: %
 6226: \def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi}
 6227: 
 6228: % Same as above, but check for italic font.  Actually this also catches
 6229: % non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from
 6230: % italic fonts.  But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway
 6231: % this is not a problem.
 6232: \def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi}
 6233: 
 6234: % Turn off all special characters except @
 6235: % (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary).
 6236: % Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
 6237: % use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
 6238: 
 6239: \catcode`\"=\active
 6240: \def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}}
 6241: \let"=\activedoublequote
 6242: \catcode`\~=\active
 6243: \def~{{\tt\char126}}
 6244: \chardef\hat=`\^
 6245: \catcode`\^=\active
 6246: \def^{{\tt \hat}}
 6247: 
 6248: \catcode`\_=\active
 6249: \def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
 6250: % Subroutine for the previous macro.
 6251: \def\_{\leavevmode \kern.06em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}}
 6252: 
 6253: \catcode`\|=\active
 6254: \def|{{\tt\char124}}
 6255: \chardef \less=`\<
 6256: \catcode`\<=\active
 6257: \def<{{\tt \less}}
 6258: \chardef \gtr=`\>
 6259: \catcode`\>=\active
 6260: \def>{{\tt \gtr}}
 6261: \catcode`\+=\active
 6262: \def+{{\tt \char 43}}
 6263: \catcode`\$=\active
 6264: \def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
 6265: %\catcode 27=\active
 6266: %\def^^[{$\diamondsuit$}
 6267: 
 6268: % Set up an active definition for =, but don't enable it most of the time.
 6269: {\catcode`\==\active
 6270: \global\def={{\tt \char 61}}}
 6271: 
 6272: \catcode`+=\active
 6273: \catcode`\_=\active
 6274: 
 6275: % If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
 6276: % name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
 6277: % So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on.
 6278: % \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file.
 6279: \def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other}
 6280: 
 6281: \catcode`\@=0
 6282: 
 6283: % \rawbackslashxx output one backslash character in current font
 6284: \global\chardef\rawbackslashxx=`\\
 6285: %{\catcode`\\=\other
 6286: %@gdef@rawbackslashxx{\}}
 6287: 
 6288: % \rawbackslash redefines \ as input to do \rawbackslashxx.
 6289: {\catcode`\\=\active
 6290: @gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@rawbackslashxx }}
 6291: 
 6292: % \normalbackslash outputs one backslash in fixed width font.
 6293: \def\normalbackslash{{\tt\rawbackslashxx}}
 6294: 
 6295: % \catcode 17=0   % Define control-q
 6296: \catcode`\\=\active
 6297: 
 6298: % Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters
 6299: % even after parsing them.
 6300: @def@turnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote
 6301: @let\=@realbackslash
 6302: @let~=@normaltilde
 6303: @let^=@normalcaret
 6304: @let_=@normalunderscore
 6305: @let|=@normalverticalbar
 6306: @let<=@normalless
 6307: @let>=@normalgreater
 6308: @let+=@normalplus
 6309: @let$=@normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
 6310: 
 6311: @def@normalturnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote
 6312: @let\=@normalbackslash
 6313: @let~=@normaltilde
 6314: @let^=@normalcaret
 6315: @let_=@normalunderscore
 6316: @let|=@normalverticalbar
 6317: @let<=@normalless
 6318: @let>=@normalgreater
 6319: @let+=@normalplus
 6320: @let$=@normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
 6321: 
 6322: % Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily.
 6323: % This is canceled by @fixbackslash.
 6324: @otherifyactive
 6325: 
 6326: % If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up.
 6327: % That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing
 6328: % a backslash.
 6329: %
 6330: @gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash}
 6331: @global@let\ = @eatinput
 6332: 
 6333: % On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then
 6334: % the first `\{ in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
 6335: % that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur.
 6336: % Also back turn on active characters that might appear in the input
 6337: % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
 6338: %
 6339: @gdef@fixbackslash{%
 6340:   @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi
 6341:   @catcode`+=@active
 6342:   @catcode`@_=@active
 6343: }
 6344: 
 6345: % Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
 6346: @escapechar = `@@
 6347: 
 6348: % These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.  
 6349: @catcode`@& = @other
 6350: @catcode`@# = @other
 6351: @catcode`@% = @other
 6352: 
 6353: @c Set initial fonts.
 6354: @textfonts
 6355: @rm
 6356: 
 6357: 
 6358: @c Local variables:
 6359: @c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
 6360: @c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message"
 6361: @c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{"
 6362: @c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
 6363: @c time-stamp-end: "}"
 6364: @c End:

FreeBSD-CVSweb <freebsd-cvsweb@FreeBSD.org>